Baron Services XDD-1000C C-BAND DOPPLER WEATHER RADAR User Manual

Baron Services Inc C-BAND DOPPLER WEATHER RADAR

S10 RECEIVER AND PROCESSOR USERS MANUAL PART 2

RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–13.  TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)The RVP8 provides an interactive setup menu that can be accessed either from a serial TTY, orfrom the host computer interface.  Most of the RVP8’s operating parameters can be viewed andmodified with this menu, and the settings can be saved in non-volatile RAM so that they takeeffect immediately on power-up.  This permits custom trigger patterns, pulsewidth control,matched FIR filter specs, PRF, etc., to be configured by the user in the field.The TTY menu also gives access to a collection of graphical setup and monitoring proceduresthat use an ordinary oscilloscope as a synthesized visual display.  The burst pulse and receiverwaveforms can be examined in detail (both in the time and frequency domain) and the digitalFIR filter can be designed interactively to match the characteristics of the transmitted pulse.3.1  Overview of Setup ProceduresThis section describes basic operations within the setup menus such as making TTY connections,entering and exiting the menus, and saving and restoring the configurations.The setup TTY should be plugged into the modular 6-pin phone jack located at the top edge ofthe RVP8 board.  The electrical interface may be either RS232 or RS423.  If the phone jackconnection is inconvenient, the terminal may be wired directly to the TIOXMT and TIORCVsignals on the P2 96-pin connector.  The TTY should be configured for 7-bit or 8-bit data (theMSB is always zeroed), no parity, and either one or two stop bits.With jumper JP4 in the ”AB” position, the interface runs at 9600 baud;  in the ”BC” position therate is 1200 baud (factory default), or some other rate set via the menu.  Thus, the ”AB” settingalways makes a reliable 9600 baud connection, even if the the alternate rate is accidently set to abad or forgotten value.  Note: the reliable 9600 baud rate requires that the crystal located at X1have a frequency of 4.9152MHz.3.1.1  Initial Entry and Help ListThe interactive setup menu is invoked by pressing the Escape key on the TTY.  If that key cannot be found on the keyboard, you can sometimes use Control “[” to generate the ESC code.The RVP8 then responds with the following banner and command prompt.       SIGMET Incorporated, USARVP8 Digital IF Signal Processor Rev.A/01–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––RVP8>The banner identifies the RVP8 product, and gives the hardware version of the board (e.g.,Rev.A) and software version (e.g., 01).  This information is important whenever RVP8 support isrequired, and it is also repeated in the printout of the “V” command (See below).The “Q” command is used to exit from the menus and to restart the RVP8 with the (possiblychanged) set of current values.  It is important to quit from the menus before attempting toresume normal RVP8 operation.  Portions of the RVP8 command interpreter remain runningwhile the menus are active (so that the TTYOP command works properly), but the processor as awhole will not function until the menus are exited.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–2From the command prompt, typing “help” or “?” gives the following list of availablecommands.Command List:  F: Use Factory Defaults  S: Save Current Settings  R: Restore Saved Settings  M: Modify/View Current Settings      Mb – Burst Pulse and AFC      Mc – Board Configuration      Mf – Clutter Filters      Mp – Processing Options      Mt<n> – Trigger/Timing <for PW n>      Mz – Transmitter Phase Control      M+ – Debug Options  P: Plot with Oscilloscope      Pb – Burst Pulse Timing      Ps – Burst Spectra and AFC      Pr – Receiver Waveforms      P+ – Visual Test Pattern  V: View Jumpers and Status  ?: Cmd list (?? Settings list)  *: Reboot <Max Slaves> <+>  ~: Swap Burst/IF Inputs on IFD  Q: Quit3.1.2  Factory, Saved, and Current SettingsThe current settings are the collection of setup values with which the RVP8 is presentlyoperating; the saved settings are the collection of values stored in non-volatile RAM.  The savedsettings are restored (made current) each time the RVP8 is powered up.  The “S” command savesthe current settings into the non-volatile RAM, and the “R” command restores those non-volatilevalues so that they become the current settings.  The “F” command initializes the current settingswith factory default values.  Thus, “F” followed by “S” saves factory defaults in non-volatileRAM, so that the RVP8 powers up in its original configuration as shipped.The RVP8 retains all of its saved settings when new ROM upgrades are installed;  the newversion of code will automatically use all of the previous saved values.  However, if the RVP8detects that the new release requires a setup parameter that did not exist in the previous release,then a factory default value will automatically be filled in for that parameter.  A warning isprinted whenever this occurs (See also, Section 3.1.4).There is also support for intermediate minor releases of RVP8 code.  Each ROM has a majorversion number (the one that it always had), plus a minor version number for intermediate”unofficial” releases.  The minor number starts from zero at the time of each ”official” release,and then increments until the next ”official” release.  The RVP8 includes the minor release
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–3number (if it is not zero) in the printout of the ”V” command.  Likewise, the minor releasenumber of the code that last saved the nonvolatile RAM is also shown.  This is an improvementover having to check the date of the code to determine which minor release was running.Note that the RVP8 does not actually begin using the current settings until after the “Q”command is entered, so that the processor exits the TTY setup mode and returns to normaloperation.3.1.3  Processor Reset CommandThe “*” command may be used to reset the signal processor from the TTY.  This can be handywhen the other methods of reset (power-up, parallel interface reset signal, or SCSI bus reset) cannot easily be done.  The command is robust in that pressing the Escape key followed by “*”,followed by two Returns, always resets the RVP8.  There are certain wait conditions from whicha TTY ESC does not immediately enter the setup monitor.  However, the above four-keysequence always forces a full reset.The RVP8 diagnostics can run in a continuous loop that is useful during production burn–intesting.  In this mode the complete set of powerup tests is repeated approximately once persecond.  The green LEDs on the RVP8/Main and RVP8/AUX boards will blink on each run as aprogress indicator.  All red LEDs will initially be on, but each will begin to blink if anydiagnostic ever fails on that board.  A line of text is also printed to the setup TTY to show theprogress of the tests and a summary of any errors.The RVP8’s Perpetual Diagnostic Loop maintains a histogram of receiver IF-Input noise levelsin 1dB steps from –85dBm to –72dBm.  You can view the accumulated noise distribution bytyping “N” while the diagnostic loop is running.  This feature is intended for use during factoryburn-in and testing of RVP8/IFD units.This special test mode can be started in two ways.  One is to powerup the processor with theRVP8/Main I/O jumpers JP17–JP22 in the (somewhat illegal) pattern: JP17:BC, JP18:BC,JP19:AB, JP20:AB, JP21:AB, JP22:AB.  This method has the advantage of not requiring a TTYconnection.  The second method is to reset the processor from the local TTY monitor using the”*+” command.  This is the normal reset command, but with a plus sign (debugging) suffix.3.1.4  V — View Internal StatusThe “V” command allows you to view some internal status within the RVP8.  This informationis available for inspection only, and can not be changed from the TTY.  The view listing beginswith the banner:Jumpers and Internal Status–––––––––––––––––––––––––––and then prints the following lines:Rev.B board, ROM V14.12 from Mon Jul 12 19:29:07 1999This line shows the revision level of the RVP8 board, the ROM code version, and thedate and time that this release was compiled.  This lets you know the age of therelease, even if the release notes have been misplaced.  The date can also be helpfulin keeping track of “unofficial” interim releases.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–4Values were last saved using ROM version V14This line tells which version of RVP8 code was the last to write into the non-volatileRAM.  It is printed only if that last version was different from the ROM version thatis currently running.  The information is included so that a “smart upgrade” can oftenbe done, i.e., values that did not exist in the prior release can be filled in with a guessthat is better than merely taking the factory default.Warning: 3 automatic defaults were inserted.This warning will appear (accompanied by a beep) if one or more automatic factorydefaults were required when the non-volatile RAM was last restored.  It is likely thatthese automatic defaults will be acceptable operating values; but it would be wise tocheck the release notes to see what new parameters were added, and to decide ontheir proper settings.  The warning will disappear once the S command is issued.This is because the missing saved slots are then filled in with valid values.Diagnostics: PASS   Slave DSP Count: 3If errors were detected by the powerup diagnostics then an error bitmask will beshown on the first line.  The word “PASS” indicates that no errors were detected.The slave DSP count is also shown, which is the number of processors that weredetected during the powerup sequence (and which will be used during subsequentprocessing).  The RVP8 main board has three slave DSPs, and the each RVP8/AUXboard supplies ten more.  Up to two RVP8/AUX boards may be attached at the sametime (23 slave DSPs total) for extremely intensive processing applications.An itemized list (consisting of bit pattern and text) is printed whenever any of thepowerup diagnostics fail.  The possible messages that might appear are:   0x00000001 : No fiber downlink signal detected   0x00000002 : 16–Bit AFC level read/write   0x00000004 : IF Receiver reset request not sent   0x00000008 : I/O FIFO full before 4096 writes   0x00000010 : I/O FIFO not full after 4096 writes   0x00000020 : Transmit phase latch bits   0x00000040 : Downlink local counter test   0x00000080 : Receiver status bits & switches   0x00000100 : Test byte pattern from receiver   0x00000200 : Test word pattern from receiver   0x00000400 : Non–Volatile RAM 0x00 and 0xFF flags   0x00000800 : UART read/write check   0x00001000 : External RAM check   0x00002000 : SCSI controller chip error   0x00004000 : Range mask RAM and addressing   0x00008000 : I&Q FIFO interrupt & trigger flags   0x00010000 : I&Q FIFO data bits   0x00020000 : FIR processing of ramp pattern   0x00040000 : Boot words not accepted by first slave   0x00080000 : No reply slave DSP count   0x00100000 : Invalid count of slave DSPs   0x00200000 : Global communication port tests
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–5   0x00400000 : Internal tests failed on some slave   0x00800000 : Trigger Generator RAM and addressing   0x01000000 : Excessive coax/fiber round trip jitter   0x02000000 : No sync found in round trip test   0x04000000 : Internal error in compile/linkCoax/Fiber/Pipeline Delay: 0.624 usec (Stdev: 0.014 usec)During bootup the RVP8 measures the round trip delay along 1) the coax uplink tothe receiver module, 2) the pipeline delays within the receiver module, 3) the opticalfiber downlink to the main board, and 4) pipeline delays in the data decodinghardware.  The time shown is accurate to within 14ns, and is used internally to insurethat the absolute calibration of trigger and burst pulse timing remains unaffected bythe distance between the main board and the receiver module.  You may freely spliceany lengths of coax and fiber without affecting the calibrations;  the delay time willchange, but the trigger and burst calibrations will remain constant.The standard deviation of the measured delay is also shown.  If the coax uplink andfiber downlink cables are run properly this variation should be less than the period ofthe acquisition clock, e.g., 0.028 msec for the standard 35.975MHz rate.  Largererrors may indicate a problem in the cabling.  A diagnostic error bit is set if the erroris greater than two acquisition clock periods.IFD:Okay,  Burst Pwr:–48.6 dBm,  Freq:35.975 MHzThis line summarizes the receiver status and Burst input signal parameters.  Thestatus may show:Okay RVP8/IFD and connecting cables are all working properlyNoFiber Problem in DownLink fiber cable from RVP8/IFD ––> RVP8/MainUpErr Problem in UpLink COAX cable from RVP8/Main ––> RVP8/IFDNoPLL RVP8/IFD PLL is not locked to external user-supplied clock referenceDiagSW RVP8/IFD test switches are not in their normal operating positionReset by: Software   Up–time: 0–days 00:49:22This line lists the origin of the last processor reset, as well as the total time that haselapsed since that reset occurred.  The running time is given in days, followed byhours : minutes : seconds.  The timer wraps around after approximately 180-days ofcontinuous operation.  The cause of the last reset will be one of the following:        1) Power-Up   2) External RESET line        3) SCSI Bus Reset   4) RESET OpCode with “Pwr” bit        5) RESET OpCode with “Rst” bit   6) RESET OpCode with “Dig” bit        7) BOOT OpCode   8) Internal Watchdog        9) TTY “*” command 10) IFD Power Sequencing      11) Burn-In Self Tests3.1.5  Burst-In / IF-In Swap CommandThe “~” command swaps the Burst and IF inputs at the IFD.  Requests to toggle the state aremade from the top level as follows:
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–6RVP8> ~IFD Burst/IF Inputs are: SWAPPEDRVP8> ~IFD Burst/IF Inputs are: NORMALThe selection remains in effect for the duration of the setup session, but then returns toNORMAL upon exiting the TTY monitor.  The “~” command is very handy because it allowsthe Pb,Pr, and Ps plotting commands to easily run with one input or the other.  Here are twoexamples of how this might be useful.SWhen checking the range alignment on a Klystron system, the Pb plot can not beused in the usual way to center the Tx burst because a continuous-wave COHO(rather than a burst pulse) is typically used as the phase reference in thesesystems.  However, if you swap the Burst and IF inputs, you can then use the Pbcommand to view and center the received leakage of the Tx pulse, and thus locaterange zero.SWhen setting up the AFC loop, you can use your RF signal generator to simulatethe transmitter’s frequency, and then run the loop with swapped RVP8/IFDinputs.  The AFC servo will then hunt and follow the siggen frequency suppliedvia the receiver.  You can then make step changes in that frequency to verify thatthe loop responds properly.Note that the same input swapping function is also available via the RVP8/IFD toggle switches.However, those switches may be located far away from the operator’s terminal; hence, thecommand interface is still a valuable addition.  The “~” command can only be used with the newRev.D RVP8/IFD; the command is unimplemented, and will not even show up in the “Help” list,when earlier receivers are connected.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–73.2  Host Computer I/O DebuggingThe RVP8 supports two very powerful monitoring functions that are helpful in debugging theI/O interface to the host computer.  One examines the physical layer of the interface, i.e., theelectrical handshake and data lines themselves.  The other examines the application layer, i.e.,the 16-bit opcodes and data that define the RVP8’s application programming interface.3.2.1  Physical-Level I/O ExaminerThe RVP8 has TTY support for debugging the physical level of the host computer’s SCSI orParallel interface.  The “X” (eXamine) command allows you to watch all incoming 16-bit wordsas they arrive from the host computer.  In addition, you may also send 16-bit words back theother way.  The “X” command is only available from the RS232 hardware TTY interface; it cannot (obviously) be used via chat mode over the same I/O interface that it trying to examine.  Assuch, the “X” command will not even be listed in the RVP8’s top level help menu during a chatmode session.While the “X” command is running, any words that arrive from the computer will immediatelybe printed in hex format, along with an “address” (word counter, starting from zero) at the startof each line.  Meanwhile, the “W” subcommand can be used to write individual words back tothe computer, and the “Q” subcommand will exit the I/O examiner entirely.Note: When the “X” command is running, the RVP8 does not interpret theincoming 16-bit words as commands and arguments.  Data sent to the RVP8 arediscarded after being printed; and output from the RVP8 will occur only if the“W” subcommand is manually used.  The “X” command is intended to debugthe physical layer of the computer interface in a very controlled manner.The following dialog was captured in response to the host computer writing 100, 200, 300(decimal) to the RVP8.  The “W” subcommand was then used twice to output a 0x4000 and0x8000 from the RVP8, and the computer then sent the values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.RVP8> XHost Computer I/O Debug Monitor–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  Q: Exit the monitor  W: Output a word to the computer0x0000:  0x0064 0x00C8 0x012COutput Word : 0x4000Output Word : 0x80000x0003:  0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004  0x00053.2.2  Application-Level I/O ExaminerThe RVP8 has TTY support for debugging the application level of the host computer’s SCSI orParallel interface.  The Real Time TTY Monitor (RTM, see Section 3.3.7) can be configured toexpose the computer’s complete I/O stream while the RVP8 is running and processingcommands in its normal manner.  Because of the enormous amount of TTY output that can be
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–8generated by this option, all other RTM selections are disabled whenever host computer I/O isbeing monitored.  Also, those other RTM selections would interfere with the multi-lineformatting of the I/O text.The TTY printout shows incoming opcodes called out by name, and subsequent input and outputwords formatted into a table.  The data are printed in Hex, twelve words per line, and include aword offset (origin zero) at the start of each line.  The offset is reset to zero at the start of eachnew input or output sequence.Lines of data that are repeats of identical values will be skipped with a “...” indication.  Thisshortens and simplifies the printout; but more importantly, it reduces TTY overhead so that theprocessor is less I/O bound.  Also for this reason, the “0x” Hex prefix is omitted during thepossibly lengthy printing of the data word tables.Note: As with all other Real Time TTY Monitor (RTM) functions, the RVP8remains completely functional while host computer I/O is being monitored.However, unlike all other RTM functions, the I/O monitor will stall the mainprocessor whenever the TTY becomes I/O bound; and the performance of theRVP8 will be degraded, perhaps severely.  It is recommended that you configurethe TTY for 38.4-KBaud to minimize the serial I/O delays.The following sample transactions were captured in response to starting the IRIS/Open ZAUTOutility.  An I/O RESET and diagnostic OTEST are first performed.  The pulse width selectionbits and maximum trigger rates are then set with PWINFO, and angle sync is disabled withLSYNC.  The header words for processed data are decided using CFGHDR, operationalparameters are loaded with SOPRM, and final RVP8 parameters are read back with GPARM.Finally, the trigger rate is set using SETPWF, and a dummy range mask consisting of a singlebin is setup with LRMSK.Opcode 0x008C (RESET)Opcode 0x0004 (OTEST)Output Words    0: 0001 0002 0004 0008  0010 0020 0040 0080  0100 0200 0400 0800   12: 1000 2000 4000 8000Opcode 0x000F (PWINFO)Input Words    0: 8421 012C 0BB8 0FA0  1F40Opcode 0x0011 (LSYNC)Opcode 0x005F (CFGHDR)Input Words    0: 0001 0000Opcode 0x0002 (SOPRM)Input Words    0: 0019 000F 07AE 0008  FE70 0080 00A0 0000  0003 000A AAAA 8888   12: C0C0 C000 0000 0000  0000 AAAA 0000 2710Opcode 0x0009 (GPARM)Output Words    0: 1200 0001 0960 FFFF  FFFF 0D5B 0000 0000  0000 4284 0000 0000   12: 0019 743D 0007 0000  0000 230B 0032 5DC0  0BB8 1770 1D4C 2EE0   24: 8421 0000 2EE0 2EE0  0960 0960 000F 07AE  0008 FE70 0080 00A0   36: 0000 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0001 000E  0000 000E 0000 0D5B   48: 8000 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0000 0000   60: 0000 0000 0000 0000
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–9Opcode 0x0010 (SETPWF)Input Words    0: 2EE0Opcode 0x0001 (LRMSK)Input Words    0: 0001 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0000 0000   12: ...  504: 0000 0000 0000 0000  0000 0000 0000 0000This RTM option to monitor computer I/O is automatically disabled at powerup, and thereforecan not be saved permanently.  This is to avoid confusing situations in which the monitor isaccidently left running –– the RVP8 would appear to be working, but at a puzzling level ofdegraded performance.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–103.3  View/Modify DialogsThe M command may be used to view, and optionally to modify, all of the current settings.  Thecurrent value of each parameter is printed on the screen, and the TTY pauses for input at the endof the line.  Pressing Return advances to the next parameter, leaving the present one unchanged.You may also type U to move back up in the list, and Q to exit from the list at any time.Typing a numeric or YES/NO response (as appropriate to the parameter) changes theparameter’s value, and displays the line again with the new value.  All numbers are entered inbase ten, and may include a decimal point and minus sign.  In some cases, several parameters aredisplayed on one line, in which case, as many parameters are changed as there are new valuesentered.  In all cases, the numbers are checked to be within reasonable bounds, and an errormessage (listing those bounds) is printed if the limits are exceeded.  Note that changes to thesettings (generally) do not take effect until after the Q command is typed, at which point theRVP8 exits the local TTY menu and resumes its normal processing operations.Since the number of setup questions is large, follow the M command with a second letter toselect the subcategory, i.e., Mb (Burst Pulse and AFC), Mc (Board Configuration), Mf (ClutterFilters), Mp (Processing Options), Mt (Triggers and Timing), Mz (Transmitter Phase Control),M* (Stand-alone Settings) or M+ (Debug Options).  The M command by itself prints the entireset of questions so that you can make a hard copy.The M command always works from the current parameter values, not from the saved values innon-volatile RAM.  If the host computer has modified some of the current values, then you willsee these changes as you skip through the setup list.  However, typing S at that point would saveall of the current settings and would, perhaps, make many changes to the original non-volatilesettings.  In general, to make an incremental change to the saved settings, first type R to restoreall of the saved values, then use M to make the changes starting from that point, and S to savethe new values.A listing of the parameters that can be viewed and modified with the M command is detailed inthe following subsections.  In each case, the line of text is shown exactly as it appears on theTTY with the factory default settings.  A definition of each parameter is given and, if applicable,the lower and upper numeric bounds are shown.3.3.1  Mc — Board ConfigurationThis set of commands configure general properties of the RVP8/IFD and RVP8/Main boards.Acquisition clock: 35.9751 MHzThis is the frequency of the oscillator at U5 in the IF receiver module.  Except forcustom receivers, this will always be 35.9751 MHz; which gives a fundamentalsample spacing of 1/240 km (approximately 4.17 meters).Limits: 33.33 to 41.67 MHzDual simultaneous receivers are being used: NOAnswer this question “Yes” if the RVP8 will be processing simultaneous signals fromtwo separate receivers.  Answering “No” will revert to normal operation with just asingle receiver.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–11Dual–LNA/Rcvr single–channel switched mode: NOFor dual-polarization single-receiver systems, this question decides whether you havea single LNA and IF-Amplifier that switches between H&V (the typical case); or twoseparate receivers, each hard wired to H and V, with switching performed after the IFamplifiers.  The question affects how noise levels are measured and applied to thedata.Synthesize LOG video output waveform: YES  Upper 100.0 dB will occupy 85.0% of voltage span  Force freerunning video mode: NO  Plot data from secondary receiver: NOThe RVP8 supports the option of sourcing a LOG Video analog output signal fromthe backpanel of the main chassis.  There are two ways that this signal can beconfigured:SSelf-Triggering, Free-Running ModeThis is the default mode that is available on all RVP8 boards.  The output signalis periodic at approximately the PRF of the radar, but is free-running, i.e., notactually synchronized with the radar trigger.  A synthetic 1.0 msec wide, fullscale, “trigger” pulse is embedded at the zero-range start of each LOG Videowaveform.  This marker can easily trigger an oscilloscope if the scope’s triggerlevel is set just below the maximum LOG Video voltage level.SWaveform Locked to Radar TriggerThis mode requires a (one-wire) hardware modification to the Rev.B RVP8/Mainboard.  The LOG Video waveform then becomes locked to the radar trigger, sothat the LOG signal can be displayed on any device that already receives the radartrigger.In either case, the LOG Video output signal is unipolar, ranging from approximately0.0V to 3.0V.  It is active during all data processing modes that the host computermight request, as well as during the idle time between scans.  The signal is absent(zero), however, during the short intervals of time that the RVP8 is beingreconfigured by the host computer, or when the RVP8’s local TTY setups are beingused.The time resolution of the synthesized LOG Video signal is fixed at 1.0 msec per bin.This is independent of the actual range resolution of the FIR matched filter.Whatever (I,Q) data are actually being computed by the FIR front end are selected fora nearest fit to each 1.0 msec synthetic output cell.  The maximum number ofincoming FIR range bins that can be selected among is 5460.  Thus, for example, themaximum range of the LOG Video signal would be 682km when the FIR rangeresolution is 125–meters.Answer the first question “Yes” if  you would like the RVP8/Main board tosynthesize and drive the LOG Video output signal.  The cost of doing this is that oneof the “slave” DSP chips will be removed from the normal Doppler processing chain,and dedicated to the task of LOG Video generation.  On a single-board system, the
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–12three available slave DSPs would be reduced to two; whereas on a dual-board system,the 13 available DSPs would be reduced to 12.  Obviously, the percentage penalty isless in a larger system.The second question decides how the overall dynamic range of the receiver will fitinto the 12-bit unipolar output voltage span of the DAC that produces the LOG Videowaveform.  The default setting calls for the upper 100dB of dynamic range to occupy85% of the output voltage span.  This means that the strongest IF input signal wouldproduce 85% of the maximum DAC voltage (approximately 2.55 Volts); 50dB downwould be 42.5%, and 100dB down would be 0%, i.e., zero volts.If you are using a self-triggering LOG Video waveform, then the 15% of headroomprovided by the default settings leaves room for the embedded trigger pulse.However, if your RVP8 has the hardware modification required to synchronize theLOG Video to the system trigger, then the full 100% of the DAC voltage span canfreely be used.  The third setup question can be used to force freerunning mode on anRVP8 that has the hardware modification.  This question is included mostly fortesting purposes.The last question only appears in dual-receiver mode.  Answer “Yes” if you wouldlike the LOG video analog output signal to be based on the data from the secondaryreceiver rather than from the primary receiver.Scope plots–  Holdoff ratio: 0.50, Stroke: 1000.0 usecThe oscilloscope plotting commands are described in Chapter 4.  This questionallows you to vary the amount of holdoff time that is inserted between each drawingstroke, as well as the stroke length itself.  Try increasing the holdoff if your scope isnot triggering reliably.  Longer holdoffs make it easier for the scope to find the initialtrigger point, but may introduce visible flicker.  To reduce flicker, try decreasing thestroke duration from its default value of 1000 microseconds.Limits: Holdoff 0.05 to 5.00, Stroke 100 to 10000 msec.PWINFO command enabled: NoThe “Pulsewidth Information” user interface command can be disabled, thus furtherprotecting the radar against inappropriate combinations of pulsewidth and PRF.  Thisis a more safe setting in general, and is even more important when DPRT triggers arebeing generated.  It can also be useful when running user code that is not yet fullydebugged.TRIGWF command enabled: NOThe “Trigger Waveform” user interface command can be disabled if you want toprevent the host computer from overwriting the RVP8’s stored trigger specifications.This is the default setting, based on the assumption that the built-in plottingcommands would be used to configure the triggers.  Answering “YES” will allownew waveforms to be loaded from the host computer.RVP7 Emulation: NoThe RVP8 implements a reasonably precise emulation of the RVP7 command set.This mode is useful because it allows an RVP8 to be plugged directly into a softwaresystem that used to run with an RVP7.  All of the configuration steps that are new and
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–13unique to the RVP8 can be handled by the local TTY and Scope setups, thus makingno demands on the user’s system code for support.  Answer this question “YES” formaximum compatibility with old driver software.  However, if you are running IRISversion 6.11 or higher, then answer “NO” to enable using new RVP8 features as theyare developed.The RVP8 returns a version number of 35 when the processor is running in RVP7compatibility mode.  This fudged value will appear in the SCSI Inquiry Commandreply, and in the GPARM parameter packet.  Elsewhere, the correct RVP8 ROMversion number will always appear.  The reason for doing this is so that the RVP8appears (to the host computer) to be a modern RVP7 with all of the latest opcodesand features.3.3.2  Mp — Processing OptionsMajor Mode- 0:User, 1:PPP, 2:FFT : 0The top level RVP8 operating modes are described in the documentation of SOPRMcommand word #9.  This question allows you to use the mode that has been selectedby that command, or to force the use of a particular mode.Window- 0:User, 1:Rect, 2:Hamming, 3:Blackman : 0Whenever power spectra are computed by the RVP8, the time series data aremultiplied by a (real) window prior to computation of the Fourier Transform.  Youmay use whichever window has been selected via SOPRM word #10, or force aparticular window to be used.R2 Processing- 0:Never, 1:User, 2:Always : 1Controls R0/R1 versus R0/R1/R2 processing.  Selecting ”0” unconditionally disablesthe R2 algorithms, regardless of what the host computer requests in the SOPRMcommand.  Likewise, selecting ”2” unconditionally enables R2 processing.  Thesechoices allow the RVP8 to run one way or the other without having to rewrite theuser code.  This is useful for compatibility with existing applications.Clutter Microsuppression- 0:Never, 1:User, 2:Always : 1Controls whether individual “cluttery” bins are rejected prior to being averaged inrange.  Same interpretation of cases as for ”R2 Processing” above.2D Final Speckle/Unfold –  0:Never, 1:User, 2:Always : 1The Doppler parameter modes (PPP, FFT, etc) include an optional 3x3 interpolationand speckle removal filter that is applied to the final output rays.  This 2-dimensionalfilter examines three adjacent range bins from three successive rays in order to assigna value to the center point.  Thus, for each output point, its eight neighboring bins inrange and time are available to the filter.  Only the dBZ,dBT,Vel, and Width data arecandidates for this filtering step; all other parameters are processed using the normal1-dimensional (three bins in range) speckle remover.  See Section 5.3.3 for moredetails.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–14Unfold Velocity (Vh–Vl) –  0:Never, 1:User, 2:Always : 0This question allows you to choose whether the RVP8 will unfold velocities using asimple (Vhigh – Vlow) algorithm, rather than the standard algorithm described inSection 5.6.  Bit-11 of SOPPRM word #10 is the host computer’s interface to thisfunction when the “1:User” case is selected (See Section 6.3).Note: This setup question is included for research customers only.  The standardunfolding algorithm should still be used in all operational systems because of itslower variance.  For this reason, the factory default value of this parameter is“0:Never”.Process w/ custom trigs –  0:Never, 1:User, 2:Always : 0This question allows you to choose whether the RVP8 will attempt to run its standardprocessing algorithms even when a custom trigger pattern has been selected via theSETPWF command.  Generally it does not make sense to do this, so the defaultsetting is “0:Never”.  Bit-12 of OPPRM word #10 is the host computer’s interface tothis function when the “1:User” case is selected (See Section 6.3).Minimum freerunning ray holdoff: 100% of dwellThis parameter controls the rate at which the RVP8 processes free-running rays in theFFT, DPRT, and Random Phase modes.  This prevents rays from being produced atthe full CPU limit or I/O limit of the processor (whichever was slower); which couldresult in highly overlapping data being output at an unusably fast rate.  Note that thisbehavior will only occur when one of these non-PPP modes is chosen, and is thenallowed to run without angle syncing.  Such is likely the case for IRIS manual scansor during Passive IRIS mode.To make these free-running modes more useful, you may establish a minimumholdoff between successive rays, expressed as a percentage of the number of pulsescontributing to each ray.  Choosing 100% (the default) will produce rays whose inputdata do not overlap at all, i.e., whose rate will be exactly the PRF divided by thesample size.  Choosing 0% will give the unregulated behavior in which no minimumoverlap is enforced and rays may be produced very quickly.Limits: 0 to 100%Linearized saturation headroom: 4.0 dBThe RVP8 uses a statistical saturation algorithm that estimates the real signal powercorrectly even when the IF receiver is overdriven (i.e., for input power levels above+4dBm).  The algorithm works quite well in extending the headroom above the topend of the A/D converter, although the accuracy decreases as the overdrive becomesmore severe.  This parameter allows you to place an upper bound on the maximumextrapolation that will ever be applied.  Choosing 0dB will disable the algorithmentirely.Limits: 0 to 6dBApply amplitude correction based on Burst/COHO: YES  Time constant of mean amplitude estimator: 70 pulsesThe RVP8 can perform pulse-to-pulse amplitude correction of the digital (I,Q) datastream based on the amplitude of the Burst/COHO input.  Please see Section 5.1.6 fora complete discussion of this feature.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–15Limits: 10 to 500 pulsesIFD built–in noise dither source: –57.0dBmThis question will only appear if the processor is attached to a Rev.D RVP8/IFD thatincludes an out-of-band noise generator to supply dither power for the A/Dconverters.  The available power levels are { Off, –57dBm, –37dBm, –32dBm,–27dBm, –22dBm, –19dBm }.  The closest available level to your typed-in value willbe used.  You can observe the band-limited noise easily in the Pr plot to confirm itsamplitude and spectral properties.For standard operation, we recommend running at –57dBm.  The problem higherlevels of dither level is that, for certain choices of (I,Q) FIR filter, the stopband of thefilter may not give enough attenuation to preserve the RVP8/IFD’s inherent noiselevel.  For example, the factory default 1MHz bandwidth Hamming filter has astopband attenuation near DC of approximately 43dB.  You can see this graphically atthe right edge of the Ps menu.  The in-band contribution of dither power is thereforeapproximately (–37dBm) – 43dB = –80dBm, which exceeds the A/D converter’s1MHz bandwidth noise of –81.5dBm.TAG bits to invert     AZ:0000    EL:0000TAG scale factors      AZ:1.0000  EL:1.0000TAG offsets (degrees)  AZ:0.00    EL:0.00The incoming TAG input bits may be selectively inverted via each of the 16-bitwords.  The values are displayed in Hex.  Setting a bit will cause the correspondingAZ (bits 0–15) or EL (bits 16–31) lines to be inverted.  Note that the SOPRMcommand also specifies TAG bits to invert.  Both specifications are XOR’ed togetherto yield the net inversion for each TAG line.The overall operations are performed in the order listed.  Incoming bits are firstinverted according to the two 16-bit XOR masks.  This yields an unsigned 16-bitinteger value which is then multiplied by the signed scale factor.  The result isinterpreted as a 16-bit binary angle (in the low sixteen bits), to which the offset angleis finally added.As an example, suppose that the elevation angle input to the RVP8 was in anawkward form such as unsigned integer tenths of degrees, i.e., 0x0000 for zerodegrees, 0x000a for one degree, 0x0e06 for minus one degree, etc.  If we apply ascale factor of 65536/3600 = 18.2044 to these units, we will get 16-bit binary anglesin the standard format.  If we further suppose that the input angle rotated“backwards”, we could take care of this too using a multiplier of –18.2044.Interference Filter– 0:None, Alg.1, Alg.2, Alg.3: 1  Threshold parameter C1: 10.00 dB  Threshold parameter C2: 12.00 dBThe RVP8 can optionally apply an interference filter to remove impulsive-type noisefrom the demodulated (I,Q) data stream.  See Section 5.1.4 for a complete descriptionof this family of algorithms.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–16Polarization Params – Filtered:YES  NoiseCorrected:YESPhiDP – Negate: NO ,  Offset:0.0 degKDP   – Length: 5.00 kmT/Z/V/W computed from:   H–Xmt:YES   V–Xmt:YEST/Z/V/W computed from:  Co–Rcv:YES  Cx–Rcv:NOThe first question decides whether all polarization parameters will be computed fromfiltered or unfiltered data, and whether noise correction will be applied to the powermeasurements.The second and third questions define the sign and offset corrections for  F and thelength scale for KDP.The fourth and fifth questions control how the standard parameters (TotalReflectivity, Corrected Reflectivity, Velocity, and Width) are computed in a multiplepolarization system.  Answering YES to H-Xmt and/or V-Xmt means that data fromthose transmit polarizations should be used whenever there is more than one choiceavailable.  Thus, these selections only apply to the Alternating and Simultaneoustransmit modes.  Likewise, answering YES to Co-Rcv and/or Cx-Rcv means to use thereceived data from the co-channel or cross-channel.  The receiver question will onlyappear when dual simultaneous receivers have been configured.A typical installation might use H-Xmt:YES,V-Xmt:YES,Co-Rcv:YES,Cx-Rcv:NO.This will compute (T/Z/V/W) from the co-polarized receiver using both H&Vtransmissions.  Including both transmissions will decrease the variance of (T/Z/V/W);although some researchers prefer excluding V-Xmt because that is more standard inthe literature.  Also, if your polarizations are such that the main power is returned onthe cross channel, then you will probably want Co-Rcv:NO and Cx-Rcv:YES.DualRx – Sum H+V Time Series: NOIn dual-receiver systems, you may choose whether the (H+V) time series data consistof the sum of the “H” and “V” samples or the concatenation of half the “H” samplesfollowed by half the “V” samples.  The later is more useful when custom software isbeing used to analyze the data from the two separate receive channels.3.3.3  Mf — Clutter FiltersDoppler Filter Set- 0:40dB, 1:50dB, 2:Saved : 0The RVP8 has two built-in IIR Doppler clutter filter sets; one set having 40dB ofstopband attenuation, and the other having 50dB.  This question chooses which set isloaded on powerup.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–17Spectral Clutter Filters––––––––––––––––––––––––Filter #1 – Type:0(Fixed)    Width:1   EdgePts:2Filter #2 – Type:0(Fixed)    Width:2   EdgePts:2Filter #3 – Type:0(Fixed)    Width:3   EdgePts:3Filter #4 – Type:0(Fixed)    Width:4   EdgePts:3Filter #5 – Type:1(Variable) Width:1   EdgePts:2   Hunt:2Filter #6 – Type:1(Variable) Width:2   EdgePts:2   Hunt:2Filter #7 – Type:1(Variable) Width:3   EdgePts:3   Hunt:3These questions define the heuristic clutter filters that operate on power spectraduring the FFT-type major modes.  Filter #0 is reserved as “all pass”, and is notredefinable here.  For filters #1 through #7, enter a digit to choose the filter type,followed by however many parameters that type requires.Fixed Width Filters (Type 0)These are defined by two parameters.  The “Width” sets the number of spectral pointsthat are removed around the zero velocity term.  A width of one will remove just theDC term; a width of two will remove the DC term plus one point on either side; threewill remove DC plus two points on either side, etc.  Spectral points are removed byreplacing them with a linear interpolating line.  The endpoints of this line aredetermined by taking the minimum of “EdgeMinPts” past the removed interval oneach side.Variable Width, Single Slope (Type 1)The RVP8 supports variable-width frequency-domain clutter filters.  These filtersperform the same spectral interpolation as the fixed-width filters, except that theirnotch width automatically adapts to the clutter.  The new filters are characterized bythe same Width and EdgePts parameters in the Mf menu, except that the Width is nowinterpreted as a minimum width.  An additional parameter Hunt allows you to choosehow far to extend the notch beyond Width in order to capture all of the clutter power.Setting Hunt=0 effectively converts a variable-width filter back into a fixed-widthfilter.The algorithm for extending the notch width is based on the slope of adjacent spectralpoints.  Beginning (Width–1) points away from zero, the filter is extended in eachdirection as long as the power continues to decrease in that direction, up to adding amaximum of Hunt additional points.  If you have been running with a fixed Width=3filter, you might try experimenting with a variable Width=2 and Hunt=1 filter.Perhaps the original fixed width was actually failing at times, but you were reluctantto increase it just to cover those rare cases.  In that case, try selecting a variableWidth=2 and Hunt=2 filter as an alternative.  In general, make your variable filters“wider” by increasing Hunt rather than increasing Width.  This will preserve moreflexibility in how they can adapt to whatever clutter is present.Residual clutter LOG noise margin: 0.15 dB/dBWhenever a clutter correction is applied to the reflectivity data, the LOG noisethreshold needs to be increased slightly in order to continue to provide reliablequalification of the corrected values.  The reason for this is that the uncertainty in thecorrected reflectivity becomes greater after the clutter is subtracted away.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–18For example, if we observe 20dB of total power above receiver noise, and then applya clutter correction of 19dB, we are left with an apparent weather signal power of+1dB above noise.  However, the uncertainty of this +1dB residual signal is muchgreater than that of a pure weather target at the same +1dB signal level.The “Residual Clutter LOG Noise Margin” allows you to increase the LOG noisethreshold in response to increasing clutter power.  In the previous example, and withthe default setting of 0.15dB/dB, the LOG threshold would be increased by 19x0.15= 2.85dB.  This helps eliminate noisy speckles from the corrected reflectivity data.Whitening Parameters––––––––––––––––––––Noise threshold for replacing a point: 1.20Replacement value multiplier: 0.5000SNR in tails, for determining width: 0.25These questions control the adaptive whitening filter that is used by the RandomPhase processing algorithms.  A spectral point will be whitened if the ratio of itspower to the noise power exceeds the “Noise threshold for replacing a point.”  Thewhitened point will consist of a complex value whose ARG is identical to that of theoriginal point, and whose MAG is the product of the noise level with the“Replacement value multiplier” term.  The nominal spectral width of the whitenedregion is a function of the power and width of the coherent signal, and the noiselevel.  Assuming a Gaussian model, the “SNR in tails...” value is the ratio of thecoherent power in the tails of the distribution to the noise level.RPhase SQI Threshold  Slope:0.50  Offset:–0.05The two values in this question define a secondary SQI threshold that is used toqualify the LOG data during Random Phase processing.  The secondary SQI level iscomputed by multiplying the primary user-supplied SQI threshold by the SLOPE,and adding the OFFSET. See also Section 5.9.3.Limits: SLOPE: 0.0 to 2.0,  OFFSET –2.0 to 1.03.3.4  Mt — General Trigger SetupsThese questions are accessed by typing “Mt” with no additional arguments.  They configuregeneral properties of the RVP8 trigger generatorPulse Repetition Frequency: 500.00 HzThis is the Pulse Repetition Frequency of the internal trigger generator.Limits: 50 to 6000Hz.Transmit pulse width: 0Limits: 0 to 3Use external pretrigger: NO  PreTrigger active on rising edge: YES  PreTrigger fires the transmitter directly: NOWhen an external pretrigger is applied to the TRIGIN input of the RVP8, either therising or falling edge of that signal initiates operation.  This decision also affectswhich signal edge becomes the reference point for the pretrigger delay times given inthe “Mt<n>” section.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–19Answer the second sub-question according to whether the radar transmitter is directlyfired by the the external pretrigger, rather than by one of the RVP8’s trigger outputs.In other words, answer “YES” if the transmitter would continue running fine even ifthe RVP8 TRIGIN signal were removed.  This information is used by the ”L” and”R” subcommands of the ”Pb” plotting command, i.e., when slewing left and right tofind the burst pulse, the pretrigger delay will be affected rather than the start times ofthe six output triggers.2–way (Tx+Rx) total waveguide length: 0 metersUse this question to compensate for the offset in range that is due to the length ofwaveguide connecting the transmitter, antenna, and receiver.  You should specify thetotal 2-way length of waveguide, i.e., the span from transmitter to antenna, plus thespan from antenna to receiver.  The RVP8 range selection will compensate for theadditional waveguide length to within plus-or-minus half a bin, and works properly atall range resolutions.POLAR0 is high for vertical polarization : NOPOLAR1 is high for vertical polarization : NOThese questions define the logical sense of the two polarization control signalsPOLAR0 and POLAR1.  In a dual-polarization radar POLAR0 should be used toselect one of two possible states (nominally horizontal and vertical, but any otherpolarization pair may also be used).  The control signal will either remain at a fixedlevel, or will alternate from pulse to pulse with a selectable transition point (SeeSection 3.3.5).  POLAR1 is identical to POLAR0, but may be configured with adifferent polarity and switch point.  This second signal could be used if the radar’spolarization switch required more than one control line transition when changingstates.Quantize trigger PRT to ((1 x AQ) + 0) clocksIt is possible to control the exact quantization of the PRT of the internal triggergenerator.  Normally the trigger PRT is chosen as the closest multiple of AQ (theacquisition clock period) that approximates the requested period.  This questionallows the possible PRT’s to be constrained to ((N x AQ) + M) clock cycles.  Thisfeature can be useful for synchronous receiver systems in which the trigger periodmust be some exact multiple of the COHO period.Blank output triggers according to TAG#0 : NO  Blank when TAG input is high : NO  Blank triggers 1:YES 2:YES 3:YES 4:YES 5:YES 6:YESThese questions control trigger blanking based on the TAG0 input line.  You firstselect whether the trigger blanking feature is enabled; and then optionally choose thepolarity of TAG0 that will result in blanking, and which subset of the six userdefinable triggers are to be blanked.Blank output triggers during noise measurement : NOThe RVP8 can inhibit the subset of blankable trigger lines whenever a noisemeasurement is taken.  This will be forced whenever trigger blanking (based onTAG0) is enabled, but it can also be selected in general via this question.  Since noisetriggers must be blanked whenever trigger blanking is enabled, this question onlyappears if trigger blanking is disabled.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–20This question permits the state of the triggers during noise measurements to beconsistent and known, regardless of whether the antenna happens to be within ablanked sector; and you have the additional flexibility of choosing blanked noisetriggers all the time.Rx–Fixed Triggers: #1:N #2:N #3:N #4:N #5:N #6:N P0:N P1:N Z:NYou have explicit control over which RVP8 trigger outputs are timed relative to thetransmitter pre-fire sequence, versus those which are relative to the actual receivedtarget ranges.  Triggers in the first category will be moved left/right by the “L/R”keys in the Pb plot, and will also be slewed in response to Burst Pulse Tracking.Triggers in the second category remain fixed relative to “receiver range zero”, andare not affected by the “L/R” keys or by tracking.This question specifies which triggers are Tx-relative and which are Rx-relative.Answer with a sequence of “Y” or “N” responses for each of the six trigger lines, forthe two polarization control lines, and for the timing of the phase control lines.  Youshould answer  No for any trigger that is involved with the pre-fire timing of thetransmitter.  If you enable the Burst Pulse Tracker (Section 5.1.3) you will probablywant to assign a Yes to some of your triggers so that they remain fixed relative to theburst itself.It is very helpful to have these two categories of trigger start times.  Triggers that firethe transmitter, either directly or indirectly, should all be moved as a group whenhunting for the burst pulse and moving it to the center of the FIR window.  However,triggers that function as range strobes should be fixed relative to range zero, i.e., thecenter of that window, and the center of the burst.  This distinction becomesimportant when the transmitter’s pre-fire delay drifts with time and temperature.Replace triggers with alternate waveforms: YES  Trigger #1 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 0  Trigger #2 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 0  Trigger #3 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 0  Trigger #4 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 1  Trigger #5 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 0  Trigger #6 – 0:Normal, 1–2:Pol0–1, 3–6:PW0–3 : 4These questions make it possible to reassign the waveforms that are driven onto thesix user trigger (TRIG1–6) BNC outputs on the backpanel of the RVP8.  This makesit easier to adapt the external cabling of the RVP8 so as to make better use of theavailable BNC connectors and related 15V drivers.  You may substitute either of thetwo polarization control lines or the four pulsewidth control lines in place of any ofthe six normal triggers.In the example above, triggers #1, #2, #3, and #5 are all driven with their normalwaveforms.  However trigger #4 will have a copy of the POLAR0 polarizationcontrol line, and trigger #6 will have a copy of the PWBW1 pulsewidth control line.Neither POLAR0 nor PWBW1 themselves are changed by these assignments.Whenever any of the six user trigger lines is reassigned from its normal setting, theplot of that trigger within the Pb command will show a hashed line across the screen.This is a graphical reminder that that trigger has been replaced by some otherwaveform.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–21Merge triggers to create composite waveforms: YES  Merge Trigger #1 into : #1:  #2:  #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:  Merge Trigger #2 into : #1:  #2:  #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:  Merge Trigger #3 into : #1:Y #2:  #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:  Merge Trigger #4 into : #1:  #2:Y #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:  Merge Trigger #5 into : #1:  #2:Y #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:  Merge Trigger #6 into : #1:  #2:  #3:  #4:  #5:  #6:These questions allow you to merge the six user triggers together; resulting in triggerpatterns that can be much more complex.  In this example, Trigger #3 will be mergedinto Trigger #1;  Trigger #3 will be unaltered, and Trigger #1 will be the “OR” ofitself with Trigger #3.  Likewise, Triggers #4 and #5 will be merged into Trigger #2so that the later will contain three distinct pulses within each PRT.  Answer eachquestion with a sequence of up to six “Y” or “N” responses in order to set the mergeddestinations for each trigger line.Note that the six triggers are still defined in the usual way in the Mt<n> menu, i.e.,start time, width, etc.  The only change is that you may now combine these individualpulse definitions into a more complex composite output waveform.3.3.5  Mt<n> — Triggers for Pulsewidth #nThese questions are accessed by typing “Mt”, with an additional argument giving the pulsewidthnumber.  They configure specific trigger and FIR bandpass filter properties for the indicatedpulsewidth only.Trigger #1 – Start:    0.00 usec        #1 – Width:    1.00 usec     High:YESTrigger #2 – Start:    0.00 usec + ( 0.500000 * PRT )        #2 – Width:   10.00 usec     High:YESTrigger #3 – Start:   –3.00 usec        #3 – Width:    1.00 usec     High:YESTrigger #4 – Start:   –2.00 usec        #4 – Width:    1.00 usec     High:YESTrigger #5 – Start:   –1.00 usec        #5 – Width:    1.00 usec     High:YESTrigger #6 – Start:   –5.00 usec + (–0.001000 * PRT )        #6 – Width:    2.00 usec     High:NOThese parameters list the starting times (in microseconds relative to range zero), thewidths (in microseconds), and the active sense of each of the six triggers generated bythe internal trigger generator.  Setting a width to zero inhibits the trigger on that line.The Start Time can include an additional term consisting of the pulse period times afractional multiplier between –1.0 and +1.0.  This allows you to produce triggerpatterns that would not otherwise be possible, e.g., a trigger that occurs half way
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–22between every pair of transmitted pulses, and remains correctly positioned regardlessof changes in the PRF  Enter this multiplier as “0” if you do not wish to use this term,and it will be omitted entirely from the printout..In the above example, Trigger #2 is a 10.0 msec active-high pulse whose leading edgeoccurs precisely halfway between the zero-range of every pair of pulses.  Likewise,Trigger #6 is a 2.0 msec active-low pulse whose falling edge is nominally 5.0 msecprior to range zero, but which is advanced by 1.0 msec for every millisecond oftrigger period.  All other triggers behave normally, and have fixed starting times thatdo not vary with trigger period.Some subtleties of these variable start times are:SThe PRT multipliers can only be used in conjunction with the RVP8’s internaltrigger generator.  The PRT-relative start times are completely disabled wheneveran external trigger source is chosen from the Mt menu.SWhen PRT-relative triggers are plotted by the Pb command, the active portion ofthe trigger will be drawn cross-hatched and at a location computed according tothe current PRF.  The cross-hatching serves as a reminder that the actual locationof that trigger may vary from it’s presently plotted position.SThe PRT multiplier for a given pulse is applied to the interval of time betweenthat pulse and the next one.  This distinction is important whenever the RVP8 isgenerating multiple-PRT triggers, e.g., during DPRT mode, or during Dual-PRFprocessing.  Multipliers from 0.0 to +1.0 are generally safe to use because theyshift the trigger into the same pulse period that originally defined it.  Forexample, a start time of (0.0 msec + (0.98 * PRT)) would position a trigger 98%of the way up to the next range zero.  But, if –0.98 were used, and if the period ofthe previous pulse was shorter than the current one, then that shorter period wouldbecome incorrect (longer) as a result of having to fit in the very early trigger.A small but important detail is built into the algorithm for producing the six usertrigger waveforms.  It applies whenever a) the trigger period is internally determined,i.e., the external pretrigger input is not being used, and b) the overall span of the sixtrigger definitions combined does not fit into that period.  What happens in this caseis that any waveforms that do not fit will be zeroed (not output) so that the desiredperiod is preserved.  This means that you can define triggers with large positive starttimes, and they will pop into existence only when the PRF is low enough toaccommodate them.For example, if Trigger #2 is defined as a 200.0msec pulse starting at +400.0msec,then that trigger would be suppressed if the PRF were 2000Hz, but it would bepresent at a PRF of 1000Hz.  Whenever a trigger does not completely fit within theoverall period it is suppressed entirely.  Thus, even though the +400.0msec start timeis still valid at 2000Hz, the entire 200.0msec pulse would not fit, and so the pulse iseliminated altogether.Start limits: –5000 to 5000 msec.        Width limits: 0 to 5000 msec.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–23Maximum number of Pulses/Sec:  2000.0 Maximum instantaneous ’PRF’ :  2000.0 (/Sec)These are the PRF protection limits for this pulsewidth.The wording of the “Maximum number of Pulses/Sec” question serves as a reminderthat the number shown is not only an upper bound on the PRF, but also a duty cyclelimit when DPRT mode is enabled.The “Maximum instantaneous ’PRF’” question allows you to configure the maximuminstantaneous rate at which triggers are allowed to occur, i.e., the reciprocal of theminimum time between any two adjacent triggers.  This parameter is included so thatyou can limit the maximum DPRT trigger rate individually for each pulsewidth.Note that the maximum instantaneous PRF can not be set lower than the maximumnumber of pulses per second.PRF limits: 50 to 20000Hz.External pretrigger delay to range zero: 3.00 usecRange Zero is time at which the signal from a target at zero range would appear at theradar receiver outputs.  This parameter adjusts the delay from the active edge of theexternal trigger to range zero.  It is important that this delay be correct when theRVP8 is operating with an external trigger, since the zero range point is a fixed timeoffset from that trigger.  When the transmitter is driven from the internal triggersignals, those signals themselves are adjusted (see Burst Pulse alignment procedures)to accomplish the alignment of range zero.Limits: 0.1 to 500 msec.Range resolution: 125.00 metersThe range resolution of the RVP8 is determined by the decimation factor of thedigital matched FIR filter that computes “I” and “Q”.  This decimation factor is theratio of the filter’s input and output data rates,  and can be any integer from six tosixteen.  The Acquisition Clock (See Mc Section) sets the input data rate.  At itsstandard frequency of 35.9751MHz, the available range resolutions (in meters) are:50.0, 58.3, 66.7, 75.0, 83.3, 91.7, 100.0, 108.3, 116.7, 125.0, and 133.3.The ranges that are selected by the bit mask in the LRMSK command are spacedaccording to the range resolution that is chosen here.  Also, the upper limit on theimpulse response length of the matched FIR filter (see below) is constrained by therange resolution.  If you choose a range resolution that can not be computed at thepresent filter length, then a message of the form: “Warning: Impulse responseshortened from 72 to 42 taps” will appear.Limits: 50.0 to 133.3 meters.FIR-Filter impulse response length: 1.33 usecThe RVP8 computes “I” and “Q” using a digital FIR (Finite Impulse Response)matched filter.  The length of that filter (in microseconds) is chosen here.  At thestandard Acquisition Clock rate of 35.9751MHz, a 1.00 microsecond impulseresponse corresponds to a filter that is 36 taps long.The filter length should be based on several considerations:
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–24SIt should be at least as long as the transmitted pulsewidth.  If it were shorter, thensome of the returned energy would be thrown away when “I” and “Q” arecomputed at each bin.  The SNR would be reduced as a result.SIt should be at least as long as the range bin spacing.  The goal here is to choosethe longest filter that retains statistical independence among successive bins.  Ifthe filter length is less than the bin spacing, then no IF samples would be sharedamong successive bins, and those bins would certainly not be correlated.SIt should be “slightly longer” than either of the above bounds would imply, sothat the filter can do a better job of rejecting out-of-band noise and spurioussignals.  The SNR of weak signals will be improved by doing this.In practice, a small degree of bin-to-bin correlation is acceptable in exchange for thefilter improvements that become possible with a longer impulse response.  The FIRcoefficients taper off to zero on each end; hence, the power contributed byoverlapping edge samples is minimal.  SIGMET recommends beginning with animpulse response length of 1.2–1.5 times the pulsewidth or bin spacing, whichever isgreater.The maximum possible filter length is bounded according to the range resolution thathas been chosen; a finer bin spacing leaves less time for computing a long filter.  Forthe RVP8 Rev.A processor, the filter length must be less than 2.92 msec at 125-meterresolution; for Rev.B and higher this limit increases to 6.67 msec.NOTE: Cascade filter software is being contemplated that will extend the maximumimpulse response length to at least 50 msec.  This is of interest when very long(uncoded CW) transmitted pulses are used.FIR-Filter prototype passband width: 0.503 MHzThis is the passband width of the ideal lowpass filter that is used to design thematched FIR bandpass filter.  The actual bandwidth of the final FIR filter will dependon 1) the filter’s impulse response length, and 2) the design window used in theprocess.  The actual 3dB bandwidth will be:SLarger than the ideal bandwidth if that bandwidth is narrow and the FIR length istoo short to realize that degree of frequency discrimination.  In these cases it maybe reasonable to increase the filter length.SSmaller than the ideal bandwidth if the FIR length easily resolves the frequencyband.  This is because of the interaction within the filter’s transition band of theideal filter and the particular design window being used.  For example, for aHamming window and sufficiently long filter length, the ideal bandwidth is anapproximation of the 6dB (not 3dB) attenuation point.  Hence, the 3dB width isnarrower than the ideal prototype width.This parameter should be tuned using the TTY output and interactive visual plot fromthe “Ps” command.  The actual 3dB bandwidth is shown there, so that it can becompared with the ideal prototype bandwidth.Limits: 0.05 to 10.0 MHz.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–25Output control 4–bit pattern: 0001These are the hardware control bits for this pulsewidth.  The bits are the 4-bit binarypattern that is output on PWBW0:3Bit Limits: 0 to 15 (input must be typed in decimal)Current noise level: –75.00 dBmPowerup noise level: –75.00 dBm–or–Current noise levels – PriRx: –75.00 dBm,  SecRx: –75.00 dBmPowerup noise levels – PriRx: –75.00 dBm,  SecRx: –75.00 dBmThese questions allow you to set the current value and the power-up value of thereceiver noise level for either a single or dual receiver system.  The noise level(s) areshown in dBm, and you may alter either one from the TTY.  The power-up level(s)are assigned by default when the RVP8 first starts up, and whenever the RESETopcode is issued with Bit #8 set.  Likewise, the current noise level is revisedwhenever the SNOISE opcode is issued.  These setup questions are intended forapplications in which the RVP8 must operate with a reasonable default value, up untilthe time that an SNOISE command is actually received.  They may also be used tocompare the receiver noise levels during normal operation, which serves as a checkthat each FIR filter is behaving as expected when presented with thermal noise.Transmitter phase switch point: –1.00 usecThis is the transition time of the RVP8’s phase control output lines during randomphase processing modes.  The switch point should be selected so that there isadequate settling time prior to the burst/COHO phase measurement on each pulse.This question only appears if the PHOUT[0:7] lines are actually configured for phasecontrol (See Section 3.3.1).Limits: –500 to 500 msec.Polarization switch point for POLAR0:  –1.00 usecPolarization switch point for POLAR1:   1.00 usecThe RVP8’s POLAR0 and POLAR1 digital output lines control the polarizationswitch in a dual-polarization radar.  During data processing modes in which thepolarization alternates from pulse to pulse, the transition points of these controlsignals are set by these two questions.  The values are in microseconds relative torange zero;  the same units used to define the start times of the six user triggers.  Thelogical sense of POLAR0 and POLAR1 is set by questions described in Section 3.3.4.Limits: –500 to 500 msec.3.3.6  Mb — Burst Pulse and AFCThese questions are accessed by typing “Mb”.  They set the parameters that influence the phaseand frequency analysis of the burst pulse, and the operation of the AFC feedback loop.Receiver Intermediate Frequency: 30.0000 MHzThis is the center frequency of the IF receiver and burst pulse waveform.  The RVP8can operate at an intermediate frequency from any of the three alias bands22–32MHz, 40–50MHz,  and 58–68MHz.  These bands are delineated by 4MHz
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–26safety zones on either side of integer multiples of half the RVP8/IFD’s 36MHzsampling frequency.  The value entered here implicitly defines the band, and hence,the boundaries of the 18MHz window in which the IF is assumed to fall.Limits: 22 to 68 MHz.Primary Receiver Intermediate Frequency:   30.0000 MHzSecondary Receiver Intermediate Frequency: 24.0000 MHzThese alternate questions will replace the previous question whenever the RVP8’sdual-receiver mode is selected.  You should enter the two intermediate frequenciesfor your primary and secondary (nominally horizontal and vertical polarized)receivers.  Note that you can easily swap receiver channels merely by exchanging thetwo frequency values.IF increases for an approaching target: YESThe intermediate frequency is derived at the receiver’s front end by a microwavemixer and sideband filter.  The filter passes either the lower sideband or the uppersideband, and rejects the other.  Depending on which sideband is chosen, an increasein microwave frequency may either increase (STALO below transmitter) or decrease(STALO above transmitter) the receiver’s intermediate frequency.  This questioninfluences the sign of the Doppler velocities that are computed by the RVP8.PhaseLock to the burst pulse: YESThis question controls whether the RVP8 locks the phase of  its synthesized “I” and“Q” data to the measured phase of the burst pulse.  For an operational magnetronsystem this should always be “YES”, since the transmitter’s random phase must beknown in order to recover Doppler data.  The “NO” option is appropriate for nonphase modulated Klystron systems in which the RVP8/IFD sampling clock is lockedto the COHO.  It is also useful for bench testing in general.  In these “NO” cases thephase of “I” and “Q” is determined relative to the stable internal sampling clock inthe RVP8/IFD module.Minimum power for valid burst pulse: –15.0 dBmThis is the minimum mean power that must be present in the burst pulse for it to beconsidered valid, i.e., suitable for input into the algorithms for frequency estimationand AFC.  The reporting of burst pulse power is described in Section 4.4;  the valueentered here should be, perhaps, 8 dB less.  This insures that burst pulses will still beproperly detected even if the transmitter power fades slightly.The mean power level of the burst is computed within the narrowed set of samplesthat are used for AFC frequency estimation.  The narrow subwindow will containonly the active portion of the burst, and thus a mean power measurement ismeaningful.  The full FIR window would include the leading and trailing pulse edgesand would not produce a meaningful average power.  Since radar peak power tends tobe independent of pulse width, this single threshold value can be applied for allpulsewidths.Limits: –60 to +10 dBm.Design/Analysis Window– 0:Rect, 1:Hamming, 2:Blackman : 1You may choose the window that is used in 1) the design of the FIR matched filter,and 2) the presentation of the power spectra for the various scope plots.  Choices arerectangular, Hamming, and Blackman; the Hamming window being the best overall
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–27choice.  The Blackman window is useful if you are trying to see plotted spectralcomponents that are more than 40dB below the strongest signal present.  It isespecially useful in the “Pr” plot when a long span of data are available.  FIR filtersdesigned with the Blackman window will have greater stopband attenuation thanthose designed with the Hamming window, but the wider main lobe may beundesirable.  The rectangular window is included mostly as a teaching tool, andshould never be used in an operational setting.Settling time (to 1%) of burst frequency estimator: 5.0 secThe burst frequency estimator uses a 4th order correlation model to estimate thecenter frequency of the transmitted pulses.  Each burst pulse will typically occupyapproximately one microsecond;  yet the frequency estimate feeding the AFC loopneeds to be accurate to, perhaps, 10KHz.  Obviously this accuracy can not beachieved using just one pulse.  However, several hundred of the (unbiased) individualestimates can be averaged to produce an accurate mean.  This averaging is done withan exponential filter whose time constant is chosen here.Limits: 0.1 to 120 seconds.Lock IFD sampling clock to external reference: NOThis question determines the usage of the shared SMA connector that is labeled“AFC/(CLK)” on the RVP8/IFD.  It is generally not necessary to phase lock the IFDsampling clock to the radar system clock, since very good stability is obtained fromthe burst phase measurements during normal operation.  However, two cases thatbenefit from clock locking are 1) using the RVP8 in a klystron system where anexternal trigger is provided, and 2) dual-receiver systems in which computation ofF is important.The following two questions will appear only if you have requested that the IFDsampling clock be locked to an external clock reference.  See Section 2.2.11 for adescription of the hardware setups that must accompany this selection.  PLL ratio of (1/1) ==> Input reference at 17.9876 MHzThe VCXO phase-locked-loop (PLL) in the RVP8/IFD can work with any inputreference clock whose frequency is a rational multiple (P/Q) of half the desiredsampling frequency, i.e., center frequency of the VCXO.  This question allows thisratio to be established.  In general, the best PLL performance will be attained whenthe ratio is reduced to lowest terms, e.g., use a ratio of 6/5 rather than 12/10.Limits: 1 to 128 for both numerator and denominator.  VCXO has positive frequency deviation: YESMost VCXOs have positive frequency deviation, i.e., their output frequency increaseswith increasing input control voltage.  This question will generally be answered“yes”, but is included to accommodate the other case as well.  The PLL will not lock,and will be completely unstable, if the wrong choice is made.Enable AFC and MFC functions: YESAFC is required in a magnetron system to maintain the fixed intermediate frequencydifference between the transmitter and the STALO.  AFC is not required in a klystronsystem since the transmitted pulse is inherently at the correct frequency.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–28The following rather long list of questions will appear only if AFC and MFCfunctions have been enabled.  AFC Servo– 0:DC Coupled, 1:Motor/Integrator : 0The AFC servo loop can be configured to operate with an external Motor/Integratorfrequency controller, rather than the usual direct-coupled FM control.  This type ofservo loop is required for tuned magnetron systems in which the tuning actuator ismoved back and forth by a motor, but remains fixed in place when motor drive isremoved.  These systems require that the AFC output voltage (motor drive) be zerowhen the loop is locked; and that the voltage be proportional to frequency error whiletracking.  Please see Section 3.3.6.1 for more details.  Wait time before applying AFC: 10.0 secAfter a magnetron transmitter is first turned on, it may be several seconds or evenminutes until its output frequency becomes stable.  It would not make sense for theAFC loop to be running during this time since there is nothing gained by chasing thestartup transient.  This question allows you to set a holdoff delay from the time thatvalid burst pulses are detected to the time that the AFC loop actually begins running.Limits: 0 to 300 seconds.  AFC hysteresis -- Inner: 5.0 KHz,  Outer: 15.0 KHzThese are the frequency error tolerances for the AFC loop.  The loop will applyactive feedback whenever the outer frequency limit is exceeded, but will hold a fixedlevel once the inner limit has been achieved.  The hysteresis zone minimizes theamount of thrashing done by the feedback loop.  The AFC control voltage willremain constant most of the time; making small and brief adjustments onlyoccasionally as the need arises.  AFC outer tolerance during data processing: 50.0 KHzIn general, the AFC feedback loop is active only when the RVP8 is not processingdata rays.  This is because the Doppler phase measurements are seriously degradedwhenever the AFC control voltage makes a change.  To avoid this, the AFC loop isonly allowed to run in between intervals of sustained data processing.  This is fine aslong as the host computer allows a few seconds of idle time every few minutes; but ifthe RVP8 were constantly busy, the AFC loop would never have a chance to run.This question allows you to place an upper bound on the frequency error that istolerated during sustained data processing.  AFC is guaranteed to be appliedwhenever this limit is exceeded.Limits: 15 to 4000 KHz.  AFC feedback slope:     0.0100 D-Units/sec / KHz  AFC minimum slew rate:  0.0000 D–Units/sec  AFC maximum slew rate:  0.5000 D-Units/secThese questions control the actual feedback computations of the AFC loop.The overall span of the AFC output voltage is set by Gain and Offset potentiometerson the RVP8/IFD module (See Section 2.2.10).  The control level that is applied tothe AFC’s 16-bit Digital-to-Analog converter is specified here in “D-Units”, i.e.,
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–29arbitrary units ranging from –100 to +100 corresponding to the complete span of theD/A converter.  Since the D–Unit corresponds in a natural way to a percentage scale,the shorter “%” symbol is sometimes used.AFC feedback will be applied in proportion to the frequency error that the algorithmis attempting to correct.  The feedback slope determines the sensitivity and timeconstant of the loop by establishing the AFC’s rate of change in (D-Units / sec) perthousand Hertz of frequency error.  For example, a slope of 0.01 and a frequencyerror of 30KHz would result in a control voltage slew of 0.3 D-Units per second.  Atthat rate it would take approximately 67 seconds for the output voltage to slew onetenth of its total span (20 D-Units / (0.3 D-Units / sec) = 67 sec).  AFC is intended totrack very slow drifts in the radar system, so response times of this magnitude arereasonable.Keep in mind that the feedback slew is based on a frequency error which itself isderived from a time averaging process (see Burst Frequency Estimator Settling Timedescribed above) .  The AFC loop will become unstable if a large feedback slope isused together with a long settling time constant, due to the phase lag introduced bythe averaging process.  Keep the loop stable by choosing a small enough slope thatthe loop easily comes to a stop within the inner hysteresis zone.See Section 3.3.6.1 for more information about these slope and slew rate parameters.  AFC span– [–100%,+100%] maps into [ –32768 , 32767 ]  AFC format– 0:Bin, 1:BCD, 2:8B4D: 0,  ActLow: NO  AFC uplink protocol– 0:Off, 1:Normal, 2:PinMap : 1The RVP8’s implementation of AFC has been generalized so that there is nodifference between configuring an analog loop and a digital loop.  The AFC feedbackloop parameters are setup the same way in each case; the only difference being themodel for how the AFC information is made available to the outside world.  Manytypes of interfaces and protocols thus become possible according to how these threequestions are answered.  AFC output follows these three steps:SThe internal feedback loop uses a conceptual [–100%,+100%] range of values.However, this range may be mapped into an arbitrary numeric span for eventualoutput.  For example, choosing the span from –32768 to +32767 would result in16-bit AFC, and 0 to 999 might be appropriate for 3-digit BCD; but any otherspan could also be selected from the full 32-bit integer range.SNext, an encoding format is chosen for the specified numeric span.  The result ofthe encoding step is another 32-bit pattern which represents the above numericvalue.  SIGMET will make an effort to include in the list of supported formats allcustom encodings that our customers encounter from their vendors.Available formats include straight binary, BCD, and mixed-radix formats thatmight be required by a specialized piece of equipment.  The “8B4D” formatencodes the low four decimal digits as four BCD digits, and the remaining upperbits in binary.  For example, 659999 base-10 would encode into 0x00419999Hex.SFinally, an output protocol is selected for the bit pattern that was produced byencoding the numeric value.  The bits may be written to the eight RVP8/Main
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–30backpanel RS232 outputs, or sent on the uplink as a value to be received by theRVP8/IFD and converted to an analog voltage.  Yet another option is for the bitsto be sent on the uplink and received by the RVP8/DAFC board, which supportsarbitrary remapping of its output pins.To summarize: the internal AFC feedback level is first mapped into an arbitrarynumeric span, then encoded using a choice of formats, and finally mapped into anarbitrary set of pins for digital output.  We are hopeful that this degree of flexibilitywill allow easy hookup to virtually any STALO synthesizer that one might encounter.    PinMap Table (Type ’31’ for GND, ’30’ for +5)    –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––    Pin01:00   Pin02:01   Pin03:02   Pin04:03   Pin05:04    Pin06:05   Pin07:06   Pin08:07   Pin09:08   Pin10:09    Pin11:10   Pin12:11   Pin13:12   Pin14:13   Pin15:14    Pin16:15   Pin17:16   Pin18:17   Pin19:18   Pin20:19    Pin21:20   Pin22:21   Pin23:22   Pin24:23   Pin25:24    FAULT status pin (0:None): 0,  ActLow: NOThese questions only appear when the “PinMap” uplink protocol has been selected.The table assigns a bit from the encoded numeric word to each of the 25 pins of theRVP8/DAFC module.  For example, the default table shown above simply assigns thelow 25 bits of the encoded bit pattern to pins 1-25 in that order.  You may also pull apin high or low by assigning it to +5 or GND.  Note that such assignments produce alogic-high or logic-low signal level, not an actual power or ground connection.  Thelatter must be done with actual physical wires.One of the RVP8/DAFC pins can optionally be selected as a Fault Status indicator.You may choose which pin to use for this purpose, as well as the polarity of theincoming signal level.  Note that the standard RVP8/DAFC module only supports theselection of pins 1, 3, 4, 13, 14, and 25 as inputs.  This setup question allows you tochoose any pin, however, because it does not know what kind of hardware may belistening on the uplink and what its constraints might be.  Burst frequency increases with increasing AFC voltage: NOIf the frequency of the transmit burst increases when the AFC control voltageincreases, then answer this question “Yes”; otherwise answer “No”.  When thisquestion is answered correctly, a numerical increase in the AFC drive (D–Units) willresult in an increase in the estimated burst frequency.  If the AFC loop is completelyunstable, try reversing this parameter.  Mirror AFC voltage on– 0:None, 1:I, 2:Q : 0AFC/MFC can be mirrored on a backpanel output of the main chassis using thisquestion.  When either “I” or “Q” is selected, the AFC/MFC voltage will be presenton the corresponding BNC output, and the other output will be used for scopeplotting.  This configuration would be useful, for example, in a dual-receivermagnetron system that needs a phase locked acquisition clock in the RVP8/IFD, butalso needs an AFC tuning voltage to control the transmit frequency.  When “None” isselected, scope plotting will revert to its normal “Q” output.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–31The voltage range of the “I” and “Q” outputs is approximately 1 Volt, and is notadjustable.  When AFC/MFC is mirrored on these lines, you will probably need toadd an external Op-Amp circuit to adjust the voltage span and offset to match yourRF components.  We also recommend that you add significant low-pass filtering(cutoff at 3Hz) to remove any power line noise or crosstalk that may be originatingwithin the RVP8/Main chassis.Enable Burst Pulse Tracking: YESThis question enables the Burst Pulse Tracking algorithm that is described in Section5.1.3.  Remarkably, for such an intricate new feature, there are no additionalparameters to configure.  The characteristic settling times for the burst are alreadydefined elsewhere in this menu, and the tracking algorithm uses dynamic thresholdsto control the feedback.Enable Time/Freq hunt for missing burst: No  Number of frequency intervals to search: 5  Settling time for each frequency hop: 0.25 sec  Automatically hunt immediately after being reset: YES    Repeat the hunt every: 60.00 secThese questions configure the process of hunting for a missing burst pulse.  Thetrigger timing interval that is checked during Hunt Mode is always the maximum+20msec; hence no further setup questions are needed to define the hunting process intime.  The hunt in frequency is a different matter.  The overall frequency range willalways be the full –100% to +100% AFC span; but the number of subintervals tocheck must be specified, along with the STALO settling time after making each AFCchange.  With the default values shown, AFC levels of –66%, –33%, 0%, +33%, and+66% will be tried, with a one-quarter second wait time before checking for a validburst at each AFC setting.You should choose the number of AFC intervals so that the hunt procedure candeduce an initial AFC level that is within a few megaHertz of the correct value.  Thenormal AFC loop will then take over from there to keep the radar in tune.  Forexample, if your radar drifts considerably in frequency so that the AFC range had tobe as large as 35MHz, then choosing fifteen subintervals might be a good choice.The hunt procedure would then be able to get within 2.3MHz of the correct AFClevel.  The settling time can usually be fairly short, unless you have a STALO thatwobbles for a while after making a frequency change.  Note that hunting in frequencyis not allowed for Motor/Integrator AFC loops, and the two AFC questions will besuppressed in that case.The RVP8 can optionally begin hunting for a missing burst pulse immediately afterbeing reset, but before any activity has been detected from the host computer.  Thismight be useful in systems that both drift a lot and generally have their transmitterOn.  However,  this option is really included just as a work around; the correct wayfor a burst pulse hunt to occur is via an explicit request from the host computer which“knows” when the pulse really should be present.  Blindly hunting in the absence ofthat knowledge can not be done because there are many reasons why the burst pulsemay legitimately be missing, e.g., during a radar calibration.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–32The automatic hunt for the burst pulse will always run at least once whenever thefeature is enabled.  The automatic hunting ceases, however, as soon as any activity isdetected from the host computer.  Only use this feature on radars with a serious driftproblem in their burst pulse timing.Simulate burst pulse samples: NOThe RVP8 can simulate a one microsecond envelope of burst samples.  This is usefulonly as a testing and teaching aid, and should never be used in an operational system.A two-tone simulation will be produced when the RVP8 is setup in dual-receivermode.  The pulse will be the sum of two transmit pulses at the primary and secondaryintermediate frequencies.  To make the simulation more realistic, the two signalstrengths are unequal; the primary pulse is 3dB stronger than the secondary pulse.  Frequency span of simulated burst: 27.00 MHz to 32.00 MHzThe simulated burst responds to AFC just as a real radar would.  The frequency spanfrom minimum AFC to maximum AFC is given here.3.3.6.1  AFC Motor/Integrator OptionThe question “AFC Servo– 0:DC Coupled, 1:Motor/Integrator” selects whether theAFC loop runs in the normal manner (direct control over frequency), or with anexternal Motor/Integrator type of actuator.  The question “AFC minimum slewrequest:...” provides additional control when interfacing to mechanical actuatorswhose starting and sustaining friction needs to be overcome.The DC-Coupled AFC loop questions (changes shown in bold) are:AFC Servo– 0:DC Coupled, 1:Motor/Integrator : 0Wait time before applying AFC: 10.0 secAFC hysteresis– Inner: 5.0 KHz,  Outer: 15.0 KHzAFC outer tolerance during data processing: 50.0 KHzAFC feedback slope:     0.0100 D–Units/sec / KHzAFC minimum slew rate:  0.0000 D–Units/secAFC maximum slew rate:  0.5000 D–Units/secand the Motor/Integrator loop questions are:AFC Servo– 0:DC Coupled, 1:Motor/Integrator : 1Wait time before applying AFC: 10.0 secAFC hysteresis– Inner: 5.0 KHz,  Outer: 15.0 KHzAFC outer tolerance during data processing: 50.0 KHzAFC feedback slope:         1.0000 D–Units / KHzAFC minimum slew request:  15.0000 D–UnitsAFC maximum slew request:  90.0000 D–UnitsNotice that the physical units for the feedback slope and slew rate limits are differentin the two cases.  In the DC-Coupled case the AFC output voltage controls thefrequency directly, so the units for the feedback and slew parameters useD-Units/Second.  In the Motor/Integrator case, the AFC output determines the rate ofchange of frequency; hence D-Units are used directly.The above example illustrates typical values that might be used with aMotor/Integrator servo loop.  The feedback slope of 1.0 D-Units/KHz means that afrequency error of 100KHz would produce the full-scale (100 D-Units) AFC output.But this is modified by the minimum and maximum slew requests as follows:
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–33SA zero D-Unit output will always be produced whenever AFC is locked.SWhen AFC is tracking, the output drive will always be at least 15 D-Units.This minimum non-zero drive should be set to the sustaining drive level of themotor actuator, i.e., the minimum drive that actually keeps the motor turning.SWhen AFC is tracking, the output drive will never exceed 90 D-Units.  Thisparameter can be used to limit the maximum motor speed, even when thefrequency error is very large.The AFC Motor/Integrator feedback loop works properly even if the motor hasbecome stuck in a “cold start”, i.e., after the radar has been turned off for a period oftime.  The mechanical starting friction can sometimes be larger than normal, andadditional motor drive is required to break out of the stuck condition.  But once themotor begins to turn at all, then the normal AFC parameters (minimum slew,maximum slew, feedback slope) all resume working properly.  The algorithmoperates as follows:SWhenever AFC correction is being applied, the RVP8 calculates how long itwould take to reach the desired IF frequency at the present rate of change.  Forexample, if we are 1MHz away from the desired IF frequency, and the measuredrate of change of the IF burst frequency is 20KHz/sec, then it will be 50 secondsuntil the loop reaches equilibrium.SWhenever the AFC loop is in Track-Mode, but the time to equilibrium is greaterthan two minutes, then the “Minimum Slew” parameter will be slowly increased.The idea is to gradually increase the starting motor drive whenever it appears thatthe IF frequency is not actually converging toward the correct value, i.e., themotor is stuck.SAs soon as the frequency is observed to begin changing, such that the desired IFwould be reached in less than two minutes, then the ”Minimum Slew” parameteris immediately put back to its correct setup value.  The loop then continues to runproperly using its normal setup values.Manual Frequency Control (MFC) operates unchanged in both of the  AFC servomodes.  Whenever MFC is enabled in the Ps command, it always has the effect ofdirectly controlling the output voltage of the AFC D/A converter.  The MFC modecan be useful when testing the motor response under different drive levels, and whendetermining the correct value for the minimum slew request.3.3.7  M+ — Debug OptionsA collection of debugging options has been added to the RVP8 to help users with thedevelopment and debugging of their applications code.  For the most part, these options shouldremain disabled during normal radar operation.  These questions are included so that the RVP8can be placed into unusual, and perhaps occasionally useful, operating states.
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–34Noise level for simulated data: –50.0 dBThis is the noise level that is assumed when simulated “I” and “Q” data are injectedinto the RVP8 via the LSIMUL command.  The noise level is measured relative to thepower of a full-scale complex (I,Q) sinusoid, and matches the levels shown on theslide pots of the ASCOPE digital signal simulator.Limits: –100dB to 0dBSimulate output rays: NOAnswering ”YES” to this question causes the RVP8 to output bands of simulateddata.  The bands can occupy a selectable range interval, and span a selectable intervalof data values.Start bin:0,  Width:10 bins,  Bands:16This question is only asked if we are simulating output rays.  The Start Bin choosesthe bin number (origin zero) where the simulated bands will begin.  The width ofeach band (in bins), and the total number of bands are also selected.  The upper limitfor all parameters is the maximum bin count for the RVP8 (which depends on boardconfiguration, and number of attached RVP8/AUX boards).Limits: Start: 0-Max,   Width: 1-Max,   Bands: 1-MaxStart data value:0,  Increment:16This question is only asked if we are simulating output rays.  The data value that willbe assigned to the first simulated band, and the data increment from one band to thenext, are selected.  The permissible values are from 0 to 65535, i.e., the full unsigned16-bit integer range.  This full range is useful when simulating 16-bit output data; forthe more typical 8-bit output formats, only the low byte of the start and increment aresignificant.Limits: 0 to 655353.3.8  Mz — Transmitter Phase ControlThese questions are used to configure the 8-Bit phase modulation codes that may be used tocontrol the phase of a coherent transmitter.  The RVP8 will output a pseudo-random sequence ofphase codes that are chosen from a specified set of available codes, i.e., all 8-bit patterns that arevalid for the phase modulation hardware.  The random sequence is output only when the RVP8is in one of its random phase processing modes (time series or parameter).  At all other times, afixed “idle” phase code pattern is output.  See also Sections 3.3.1 and 3.3.5 where related phasecontrol questions are found.8–Bit code to output when idle: 0x00This is the bit pattern to be output whenever the RVP8 is not in a random phaseprocessing mode.  Note that this “idle” code does not have to be one of the“active”codes that are enabled below.Selection of Valid 8-Bit States–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––00–0F: Y – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – –
RVP8 User’s ManualApril 2003 TTY Nonvolatile Setups (draft)3–3510–1F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 20–2F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 30–3F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 40–4F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 50–5F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 60–6F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 70–7F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 80–8F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – 90–9F: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – A0–AF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – B0–BF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – C0–CF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – D0–DF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – E0–EF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – – F0–FF: – – – – – – – –  – – – – – – – –This set of questions defines the subset of active 8-bit codes that are valid states forthe transmit phase modulator.  Answer each line with a sequence of Y’s or N’s toindicate whether the corresponding 8-bit code is enabled.  Only the codes that appearwith a “Y” will be used by the RVP8; the “–” indicates an unused code.  The “–’character was used instead of “N” so that the visual contrast of the printed tablewould be improved.As an example, if  your klystron transmitter has an octant phase modulator that iscontrolled by three digital lines, you might enable phase codes zero through seven,and then cable the modulator to the low three bits of the 8-bit code.  The upper fivebits would not need to be used in this case.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–14.  Plot-Assisted SetupsThe RVP8/IFD receiver module replaces virtually all of the IF components in a traditionalanalog receiver.  The alignment procedures for those analog components are usually verytedious, and require continued maintenance even after they are first performed.  Subtle drifts incomponent specifications often go unnoticed until they become so severe that the radar’s data arecompromised.The RVP8 makes a big improvement over this by providing an interactive graphical alignmentprocedure for burst pulse detection, Tx/Rx phase locking, and calibration of the AFC feedbackloop.  You may view the actual samples of the burst pulse and receiver waveform, examine theirfrequency content, design an appropriate matched filter, and observe live operation of the AFC.It is a simple matter to check the spectral purity of the transmitter on a regular basis, and todiscover the presence of any unwanted noise or harmonics.  Moreover, the RVP8 is able to trackand modify the initial settings so that proper operation is maintained even with changes intemperature and aging of the microwave components.The Plot-Assisted Setups are accessed using the various “P” commands within the normal TTYsetup interface.  These commands are described later in this chapter.  For a standalone RVP8 thegraphical output can be viewed as a synthesized image on an ordinary oscilloscope.  Section 4.1describes how to make the oscilloscope connections.  The RVP8 also supports new opcodes thatallow the host computer to monitor the data being plotted.  Users with IRIS/Open software canview the plots directly on their workstation screen, and thus, can carry out the graphical checkupand  alignment procedures remotely via a network.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–24.1  Oscilloscope ConnectionsAll that is required to view the graphical displays is an oscilloscope with a single vertical inputchannel.  Setup the scope as follows:Vertical Input BNC cable to “Q” output of RVP8, terminated in 50W or 75Waccording to cable type.Vertical Channel Variable gain, approximately 1V full–scale deflection.High frequency rejection enabled (to “soften” the appearance)Horizontal Time Base 100 msec/division (1ms full sweep), no holdoff.Trigger Source From vertical channel, rising edge, DC coupled.Trigger Level Either –0.3V or +0.3V (approximately)Trigger Mode Use “Norm” rather than “Auto”, so that the display will be blank whennothing is being plotted.The RVP8 synthesizes a waveform on its “Q” channel consisting of a repeating sequence ofgraphical “strokes”, each of which is 1ms in duration.  A typical plot will have between five andfifteen strokes that blend together to form the complete image.  In between each stroke is a0.5ms idle period in which the output voltage remains at its lowest level (bottom of the screen).The idle period ends with a 2.0msec “trigger” pulse to the top of the screen, followed by the next1.0ms drawing stroke.Because the oscilloscope is set to trigger on the rising edge of its input, these brief trigger pulseswill initiate the horizontal sweeps that draw each stroke of the image.  Thus, the waveform isself triggering, and no external trigger signal is required.  This model assumes that the 0.5msidle period (50% of the full sweep time) is long enough for the scope’s horizontal time base toretrace and begin waiting for the next trigger event.  Most scopes can easily do this; but if not,try increasing the holdoff ratio (See setup question on page 3–12) until a clean and stable displayis observed.Z-axis (intensity) modulation is not required since the oscilloscope automatically blanks its beambetween sweeps.  When a plot requires certain strokes to be appear brighter than others, theRVP8 accomplishes this merely by drawing that particular stroke more than once in the overallsequence.The plotting technique relies on the luminance persistence of the oscilloscope phosphor to blendthe multiple strokes into a single, flicker free, complex display.  This happens automatically onan analog scope, but can be awkward if a digital sampling scope is used.  This is because adigital scope is usually intended to capture and hold a single trace of data, rather than to sweepout multiple traces and allow them to blend into a single image.  Digital scopes are notrecommended here, but if one must be used, try experimenting with its controls that affectpersistence and overwriting.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–34.2  P+ — Plot  Test PatternThe RVP8 can produce a simple test pattern that is useful when the oscilloscope is attached forthe first time.  From the TTY monitor enter the “P+” command.  This will print the message“Plotting Test Pattern...” on the TTY and then produce the plot shown in Figure 4–1.  Thisdisplay is actually an overlay of six different strokes: 1) bottom line, 2) middle line, 3) top line,4) line sloping up, 5) line sloping down, and 6) the sine wave pattern.  The later changes phasewith each plot so that, with a little imagination, it appears to be radiating from the left side of thedisplay.Figure 4–1: Oscilloscope Display of Test PatternVerify that the test pattern is stable, and adjust the vertical gain so that the top and bottom linesare exactly the full height of the oscilloscope screen.  At the same time, adjust the horizontal andvertical offsets so that the image is exactly centered.  When you are satisfied that the plot isbeing drawn correctly, type “Q” or ESC to return to the TTY monitor.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–44.3  General Conventions Within the Plot CommandsThe “Pb”, “Ps”, and “Pr” commands all have a similar structure to their TTY user interface.Each command begins by printing a list of subcommands that are valid in that context.  Thesesubcommands are single keystrokes that are executed immediately by the RVP8 as they aretyped.  The “ENTER” key is not required.  The available subcommands are different for eachplot command; but, as much as possible, each key has a similar meaning across all commands.The working and measured parameters for each plot command are printed on the TTY as twolines of information following the subcommand list.  The first line contains settings that onlychange when a subcommand is issued; but the second line is live and reflects the current statusof the burst input, the IF input, or the AFC output.  The first line is printed just once, but thesecond line is continually overprinted on top of itself.  This makes it appear as a live status linewhose values always remain up to date.  The ”Pb”, ”Ps”, and ”Pr” commands will report ”NoTrigger” on the TTY status line whenever the external trigger is expected but missing.The TTY screen will scroll upward each time a new subcommand is executed, so that a historyof information lines and command activity can be seen on the screen.  You may also use theCarriage-Return key to scroll the display up at any time.  If the initial list of subcommandsdisappears off the top, you may type “?” to force a reprint.  To exit the plot command entirelyand return to the TTY main menu type “Q” or ESC.  These basic “help” and “exit” keystrokesapply everywhere within the RVP8 setup menus.  To save space and minimize clutter on theTTY screen, they are not shown in the itemized list of subcommands.Most commands have a lowercase and an uppercase version.  If a lowercase command doessomething, then its uppercase version does the same thing but even more so (or in reverse).  Forexample, if the “w” subcommand widens something by a little bit, then “W” would widen it alot.  This simple convention reduces the number of different subcommand keys that are needed,and makes the interface easier to memorize.The oscilloscope display and TTY status lines are continually updated with fresh data severaltimes per second.  Occasionally it is useful to freeze a plot so that it can be studied in moredetail, or compared with earlier versions.  To accomplish this, every plotting command supportsa “Single Step” mode that is accessed by typing the “.” (period) key.  This key causes theoscilloscope display and TTY status lines to freeze in their present state, and the message“Paused...” will be printed.  Subsequently, typing another “.” will single step to the next dataupdate, but the plot and printout will still remain frozen.  Typing “Q” or ESC will exit the plotcommand entirely (as they normally do).  All other keys return the plot command to its normallive updating, but the key is otherwise discarded (i.e., subcommand keys are not executed whileexiting from single step mode).All of the plot commands support subcommands whose only purpose is to alter the appearanceof the display, e.g., zoom, stretch, etc.  These subcommands make no changes to the actualworking RVP8 calibrations.  However, the display settings are stored in nonvolatile RAM justlike all of the other setup parameters.  This means that all previous display settings will berestored whenever you restart each plot command.  This is very convenient when alternatingamong the various plots.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–5The “Pb”, “Ps”, and “Pr” commands are intended to be used together for the combined purposeof configuring the RVP8’s digital front end.  You may, of course, run any of the commands atany time; but the following procedure may be used as a guideline for first time setups.  The fullprocedure must be repeated for each individual pulsewidth that the radar supports.1. Use Mb to set the system’s intermediate frequency (See Section 3.3.6).2. Use Mt to choose the PRF and pulsewidth (See Section 3.3.4).  Also, choose therange resolution now, as it may constrain the design of the matched filter later.3. Use Mt0,Mt1, etc., to set the relative timing of all RVP8 triggers that are used bythe the radar.  Do not worry about the absolute values of the trigger start times.Just setup their polarity and width, and their start times relative to each other (SeeSection 3.3.5).  Make an initial guess of FIR filter length as 1.5 times thepulsewidth.4. Use Pb to slew the start times of all triggers so that the burst pulse is properlysampled (See Section 4.4).  Refine the impulse response length if necessary sothat all samples easily fit within the display window.5. Use Ps to design the matched FIR filter (See Section 4.5).  Further refine theimpulse response length and passband width to achieve a filter that matches thespectral width of the burst, and that has strong attenuation at DC.  If the FIRlength is changed, return to Pb to verify that the burst is still being sampledproperly.6. Continue using Ps and Mb to tune up the AFC feedback loop.  The settings thatwork for one pulsewidth should also work for all others.7. Use Pr to verify that targets are being detected with good sensitivity (See Section4.6).Sometimes it is useful to run the Pb and Ps commands with samples from the IF-Input of theRVP8/IFD, rather than from the Burst-Input.  Likewise, it is sometimes useful to view the Prplots on samples of Burst data.  The top-level “~” command (See Section 3.1.5) allows you to dothis easily.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–64.4  Pb — Plot Burst Pulse TimingFor magnetron radars the RVP8 relies on samples of the transmit pulse to lock the phase of itssynthesized “I” and “Q” data, and to run the AFC feedback loop.  The “Pb” command is used toadjust the trigger timing and A/D sampling window so that the burst pulse is correctly measured.4.4.1  Interpreting the Burst Timing PlotThe oscilloscope plot will ultimately resemble Figure 4–2, which shows a successful capture ofthe transmitter’s burst pulse.  The horizontal axis of the display represents time, and the overalltime span from the left edge to the right edge is listed as “PlotSpan” on the TTY.Figure 4–2: Successful Capture of the Transmit BurstThe upper portion of the plot shows the sampling window wherein the burst pulse is measured.The duration of this window is determined by the impulse response length of the matched FIRfilter.  This is because the same FIR coefficients that compute “I” and “Q” are also used tocompute the reference phase vectors for the burst pulses.  The A/D samples of the RVP8/IFD’sburst input are plotted (somewhat brighter) within the sample window.The RVP8 computes the power-weighted center-of-mass (COM) of the burst pulse envelope.This allows the processor to determine the location of the “middle” of the transmitted pulsewithin the burst analysis window.  The Pb plot displays small tick marks on the top and bottomof the burst sample window to indicate the location of the COM.  These markers are onlydisplayed when valid burst power is detected.  A second “error bar” is drawn surrounding thetick mark to indicate the uncertainty of the mark itself.  This error interval is used by the burstpulse tracking algorithm to decide when a timing change can be made with confidence.It is possible to independently choose a subinterval of burst pulse samples that are used by theAFC frequency estimator.  Thus, the AFC feedback loop is not constrained to use the same set ofsamples that are chosen for the FIR filter window.  The FIR window typically is longer than the
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–7actual transmitted pulse, and thus, the samples contributing to the frequency estimate willinclude the leading and trailing edges of the pulse.  These edges tend to have severe chirps andsidebands, compared to the more pure center portion of the pulse. The AFC frequency estimate(which is power weighted) could be mislead by these edges and might not tune to the optimumcenter frequency if they were included.The lower portion of the plot shows the six triggers that are output by the RVP8.  Trigger #0 is atthe top, and Trigger #5 is on the bottom.  They are drawn in their correct polarity and timingrelative to each other, and relative to the burst sample window.  Note that the sample window isalways drawn in the center of the overall time span.  Thus, depending on the PlotSpan andlocation of the six trigger’s edges, triggers that do not vary within the plotted time span willappear simply as flat lines.The RVP8 defines “Range Zero” to occur at the center of the burst sample window.  This alsodefines the zero reference point for the starting times of the six programmable triggers.  Forexample, a trigger whose starting time is zero will be plotted with its leading edge in the exacthorizontal center of the display.  Knowing this convention makes the absolute value of thetrigger start times more meaningful.4.4.2  Available Subcommands Within “Pb”The list of subcommands is printed on the TTY:Available Subcommands within ’Pb’:     I/i     Impulse response length Up/Dn  A/a & S/s  Aperture & Start of AFC window  L/l & R/r  Shift triggers left/right     T/t     Plot time span Up/Dn     Z/z     Amplitude zoom     B/b     BP Tracking On/Off (temporary)      +      Hunt for missing burst      .      Single StepThese subcommands change the matched filter’s impulse response length, shift the radartriggers, and alter the format of the display.   I/i The “I” command increments or decrements the length of the matchedfilter’s impulse response.  Each keystroke raises or lowers the FIRlength by one tap.A/a & S/s These commands raise/lower the aperture/start of the subwindow ofburst pulse samples for AFC.  If you never use these commands, thenthe full FIR window will be used; however, shortening the AFCinterval will result in two sample windows being drawn on the plot.The smaller AFC window should be positioned into the center portionof the transmitted pulse, where the burst amplitude and frequency arefairly stable.L/l & R/r These two commands shift the entire group of six RVP8 triggers leftor right (earlier or later in time).  The lowercase commands shift in
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–80.025 msec steps, and the uppercase commands shift in 1.000 msecsteps (approximately).  The reason for shifting all six triggers at onceis that the relative timing among the triggers remains preserved.However, the absolute timing (relative to range zero) will vary, andthis will cause the burst pulse A/D samples to move within the samplewindow.   T/t The “T” command increments or decrements the overall time span ofthe plot.  The available spans are 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000,2000 and 5000 microseconds.  The value is reported on the TTY as“PlotSpan”.  Z/z The “Z” command zooms the amplitude of the burst pulse samples sothat they can be seen more easily.  The value is reported on the TTY as“Zoom”.B/b These keys temporarily disable or re-enable the Burst Pulse Tracker.The tracker must be disabled in order for the L/R keys to be used toshift the nominal trigger timing.  The “b” key disables tracking andsets the trigger slew to zero; the “B” key re-enables tracking startingfrom that zero value.+The “+” subcommand initiates a hunt for the burst pulse.  Progressmessages are printed as successive AFC values are tried, and thetrigger slew and AFC level are set according to where the pulse wasfound.  If no burst pulse can be found, then the previous trigger slewand AFC are not changed.4.4.3  TTY Information Lines Within “Pb”The TTY information lines will resemble:Zoom:x2,  PlotSpan:5 usec,  FIR:1.36 usec (49 Taps)Freq:27.817 MHz, Pwr:–53.9 dBm, DC:0.14%, Trig#1:–5.00, BPT:0.00 Zoom Indicates the magnification (in amplitude) of the plotted samples.  Azoom level of “x1” means that a full scale A/D waveform exactly fillsthe height of the sample window.  Generally, the signal strength of theburst pulse will not be quite this high.  Thus, use larger zoom levels tosee the weaker samples more clearly.  You may zoom in powers of twoup to x128.PlotSpan Indicates the overall time span in microseconds of the complete scopedisplay, from left edge to right edge.   FIR Indicates the length of the impulse response of the matched FIR filter,and hence, the duration of the burst pulse sample window.  The lengthis reported both as a number of taps, and as a time duration inmicroseconds.  Freq Indicates the mean frequency of the burst, derived from a 4th ordercorrelation model.  The control parameters for this model are set usingthe “Mb” command (Section 3.3.6).
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–9  Pwr Indicates the mean power within the full window of burst samples.DC offsets in the A/D converter do not affect the computation of thepower, i.e., the value shown truly represents the waveform’s(Signal+Noise) energy.   DC Indicates the nominal DC offset of the burst pulse A/D converter.  Thisis of interest only as a check on the integrity of the front end analogcomponents.  The value should be in the range 2.0%. Trig#1 Indicates the starting time of the first (of six) RVP8 trigger outputs.This number will vary as the “L” and “R” subcommands cause thetriggers to slew left and right.  Note that if the radar transmitter isdirectly fired by an external pretrigger, then the pretrigger delay (inthe form “PreDly:6.87”) will be printed instead.BPT This shows the present value of timing slew (measured inmicroseconds) being applied to track the burst.  The slew will be zeroinitially when the RVP8 is first powered up, meaning that the normaltrigger start times are all being used.4.4.4  Recommended Adjustment ProceduresThe burst pulse timing must be calibrated separately for each individual pulsewidth.  Repeat thefollowing procedure for each pulsewidth that you plan to use.  Each iteration is independent.It is first necessary to setup the proper relative timing for all RVP8 triggers that are being used.The six trigger output lines are completely interchangeable, and each may be assigned to anyfunction within the radar system.  For example, Trigger #0 might be the transmitter pretrigger,Triggers #2 and #3 might synchronize external displays, and Triggers #1, #4, and #5 might beunused.Choose an initial impulse response length of 1.5 times the transmit pulsewidth.  This length willbe refined later when the matched filter is designed (See Section 4.5).  Adjust the plot time spanto view a small region around the sample window, and set the initial amplitude zoom to x16.This assures that the plotted waveform will still be noticeable even if the burst signal strength isvery weak.Verify that the transmitter is radiating, and observe the burst pulse samples on the display.  Usethe “L” and “R” commands to shift the timing of all six triggers relative to range zero.  This hasthe effect of moving the burst sampling window relative to the transmitted pulse.  Depending onwhether the triggers are set properly, you may at first see nothing more than a flat line ofmisplaced A/D samples.  However, after a few moments of hunting, the burst pulse shouldappear on the oscilloscope screen.  Fine tune the triggers so that the burst envelope is centered inthe window, and adjust the amplitude zoom for a comfortable size display.The clean center portion of the burst pulse should then be isolated to a narrower subwindow ofthe overall FIR interval.  Use the”A” and “S” commands to change the aperture and start of thenarrowed region from which the AFC frequency estimator’s data will be derived.Check that the burst pulse signal strength is reasonably matched to the input span of theRVP8/IFD’s A/D converter.  The maximum analog signal level is +4dBm.  Exceeding this levelproduces distorted samples that would seriously degrade the algorithms for phase locking and
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–10AFC.  However, if the signal is too weak, then the upper bits of the A/D converter are wastedand noise is unnecessarily introduced.  We recommend a peak signal level between –6dBm and+1dBm, i.e., a signal that might be viewed at x2 or x4 zoom.  Take note of the burst energy levelreported on the TTY; it will help decide the minimum energy threshold for a valid burst pulse,which is needed in Section 3.3.6.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–114.5  Ps — Plot Burst Spectra and AFCOnce the transmit burst pulse has been captured the next step is to analyze its frequency contentand to design a bandpass filter that is matched to the pulse.  In a traditional analog receiver thematched filters use discrete components that can not be adjusted, and the transmit spectrum cannot be viewed unless a spectrum analyzer is on hand.  The RVP8 eliminates all of theserestrictions via its “Ps” command, which plots the burst spectrum, designs the bandpass filter,plots its frequency response, and also helps with alignment of the AFC.4.5.1  Interpreting the Burst Spectra PlotsAn example of a plot from the Ps command is shown in Figure 4–3.  The oscilloscope screen isdivided into two independent areas.  The major portion (the lower seven eighths) is devoted topower spectrum plots of the burst pulse and/or the matched filter response.  The top portion(single line) serves as a visual indicator of the present AFC level.Figure 4–3: Example of a Filter With Excellent DC RejectionThe horizontal axis of the spectrum plot represents frequency.  The overall span from the leftedge to the right edge is always 18MHz, but the exact endpoints depend on which alias band theradar’s intermediate frequency falls in.  For example, a 30MHz IF would imply a horizontal axisrange of 18MHz to 36MHz, whereas a 60MHz IF would make the range 54MHz to 72MHz.The frequency span is printed on the TTY when the command is first entered.Since the left edge of the spectral plot always represents an integer multiple of 18MHz, eitherthe left side or the right side will always be a multiple of 36MHz.  This is important toremember when designing the matched filter, since fixed DC offsets in the A/D converters willappear aliased at these 36MHz multiples.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–12The vertical axis of the spectrum plot is logarithmic and is marked with faint horizontal lines in10-dB increments.  An overall dynamic range of 70 dB can be viewed at once.  The horizontallines also contain major and minor tick marks to help calibrate the frequency axis.  Major marksare small downward triangles that represent integer multiples of 5MHz; minor marks are inbetween and represent 1-MHz steps.  The power spectrum example in Figure 4–3 is from asystem with an intermediate frequency of 30MHz.  Thus, the left edge of the plot begins at18MHz, and the graph is centered on the third major tick, i.e., 30MHz.Two types of spectra can be plotted on the screen: 1) the frequency response of the FIR filter,and 2) the frequency content of the burst pulse itself.  The burst spectrum is computed by firstapplying a Hamming window to the raw samples.  You may choose to view either plotindividually, or both at the same time.Figure 4–3 is an example of a single filter response plot, whereas Figure 4–4 shows a combineddisplay of both spectra.  The combined display makes it easy to compare the filter beingdesigned with the live waveform that it is intended to selectively pass.  Note that the filter’sfrequency response is always drawn with its passband peak touching the top of the plot.  Thevertical height of the burst spectrum, however, will vary with signal strength but can be adjustedusing the “Z” subcommand.The horizontal line at the top of the plotting area is also marked with an upward pointing majorand minor tick.  These indicate the present value of the burst pulse frequency estimator.  Themajor tick is a triangle whose position along the horizontal axis corresponds directly to theestimated frequency.  It should always be positioned directly over the main lobe of spectralpower.  The minor tick gives finer scale resolution by indicating the fractional part of each1-MHz multiple.  For example, in Figure 4–3 the burst frequency estimate was 30.027MHz.The major tick thus appears slightly to the right of 30MHz, and the minor tick appears 2.7%across the screen.  Note that when an upward tick happens to overlap a downward tick the twosimply add together so that both can still be seen.It is helpful to read the minor tick relative to the ten horizontal division lines that are present onmost scopes.  Motion of the minor tick is apparent even with very small changes in burst pulsefrequency;  a change of just 5 KHz can easily be seen.  This means that you can observe thefrequency drift of the magnetron in great detail, and also watch the AFC’s behavior in real time.The horizontal line at the very top of the display (above the spectra plot) serves to indicate thepresent value of the AFC control voltage.  The line contains an upward pointing major andminor tick, similar to the ones used to represent the burst frequency estimate on the line below.However, the horizontal axis now represents voltage rather than frequency, and the overall spanis the complete range of the AFC’s digital-to-analog converter.  The major tick will move fromthe left edge to the right edge as the AFC varies from its minimum to maximum value.  Theminor tick will traverse the screen at ten times this rate.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–134.5.2  Available Subcommands Within “Ps”The list of subcommands is printed on the TTY:Frequency span of the plot is 18.0 MHz to 36.0 MHz.Available Subcommands within ’Ps’:     I/i     Impulse response length Up/Dn  N/n & W/w  Filter bandwidth Narrower/Wider  U/u & D/d  MFC Up/Down (On/Off ’=’ , Test ’|’)  A/a & S/s  Aperture & Start of AFC window      #      Print filter coefficients      $      Search for an optimal filter     V/v     Number of spectra averaged     Z/z     Amplitude zoom   <space>   Alternate Plots      %      Toggle between dual receivers      .      Single StepThese subcommands change the design of the matched FIR filter, assist with calibration of theAFC loop, and alter the format of the display.   I/i The “I” command increments or decrements the length of the matchedfilter’s impulse response.  Each keystroke raises or lowers the FIRlength by one tap.  Often the matched filter’s characteristics can bevery much improved merely by changing the FIR length by one or twotaps.  Be sure to experiment with this as you design your filter.N/n & W/w The “N” and “W” commands change the passband width of thematched filter, making it narrower or wider.  The lower casecommands make changes in 1KHz steps, and the upper casecommands use 100KHz steps.  The value is reported on the TTY as“BW”.  Often a small change in passband width will shift the exactlocations of the filter’s zeros, and possibly improve the DC rejection.U/u & D/d The “U” and “D” commands implement the Manual FrequencyControl (MFC) override, and allow the RVP8/IFD’s AFC outputvoltage to be manually set to any fixed level.  The lower casecommands make changes in 0.05 D-Unit steps, and the upper casecommands use 1.0 D-Unit steps.  The value is reported on the TTY as“AFC”.=MFC mode is toggled on and off using the “=” key.  A warning will beprinted if the Ps command is exited while MFC is enabled, and youwill be given a second chance to reenable AFC.|The AFC test submode is entered by typing the “|” key.  The followinglist of keybindings will be shown, and will remain in effect until thetest mode is exited by typing “Q”.AFC Test Mode Subcommands      W      Use Walking–Ones pattern      P      Toggle Pin/Bit numbering   0–9,A–O   Toggle AFC Bits 0–24 (Pins 1–25)
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–14               2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1               4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0               – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –               O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0The Ps command continues to run normally during the AFC testmode.  The customary AFC information will be replaced with ahexadecimal readout of the present 25-bit value.  Your live displaymay look something like:Navg:3,  FIR:1.33 usec (48 Taps),  BW:1.000 MHz,  DC–Gain:ZEROFreq:26.610 MHz,  Pwr:–64.6 dBm,  AFC–Test:0000207F (Bits)Initially, a walking-ones bit pattern will be output in lieu of the normalformatted AFC value.  This test pattern shifts a single “1” downwardthrough the AFC word, making a transition approximately every 4ms.It is intended to help ring out and test the wiring for digital AFCinstallations.  The walking-ones test is handy as an oscilloscopediagnostic, and you may return to it at any time by typing “W”.Typing any of the characters “0” through “9” or “A” through “O” willenter a new mode in which a static 25-bit digital AFC pattern iscontrolled directly.  Each key toggles its corresponding bit, assummarized in the keybindings printout.  Any 25-bit pattern can bemade by toggling the appropriate bits (initially all zero) to one.Within any particular pattern, it is also easy to toggle a particular bitOn/Off in order to verify its function.The “P” command lets you decide whether the 25-bit word representsa numeric AFC span that is mapped into pins via the pin-map table inthe Mb menu; or whether it represents those pins directly.  The printedhex test value will be followed either by “(Bits)” or “(Pins)”accordingly.  When in “Pins” mode, the “0” key toggles Pin-1, the “1”key toggles Pin-2, etc.  When in “Bits” mode, the “0” key toggleswhatever pin or pins have been designated to be driven from Bit-0 ofthe numeric AFC.  The “Pins” mode is useful when you are doing theinitial electrical tests of the wiring of each pin.  After the pin wiringhas been verified and the Mb mapping table has been created, then the“Bits” mode allows you to test the complete digital AFC interface.#The “#” command results in a printout of the coefficients of thecurrent FIR filter.  The values are scaled by the coefficient with thelargest absolute value, so that they all fall within the –1 to +1 range.This detailed information may be used to model the behavior of thefilter for point targets that fall in between discrete range bins, e.g., aswill happen when performing a radar sphere calibration.  See Section5.1.1 for the exact definition of these coefficients.$The “$” command performs an automatic search for optimal (DC gainof zero) filters in the vicinity of the current one.  As an example,suppose that we wanted an optimal filter that was approximately 2.2msec long and 650 KHz wide.  We would first use the “I/i” and
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–15“W/wN/n” subcommands to manually move to that starting point.Typing “$” would then print a dialog line in which the search spanlength and width are chosen.  You may keep the indicated values ortype in new ones, just as for all RVP8 setup questions.  The searchbegins when the spans are accepted.The search procedure may require a few seconds to a few minutes,depending on the length and width spans that are being scanned.During this time, a progress message is printed showing the length andwidth currently under examination.  You may type “Q” to abort thesearch and retain the original filter settings.  When the searchcompletes normally, it will print “Done” and replace the old filtersettings with the best ones that could be found.In dual-receiver mode, the ”$” command will search for a filter thatminimizes the maximum width and DC offset at both receiver’sintermediate frequencies.  The final filter will be the one that has thebest simultaneous performance at both IFs.   V/v The “V” command increments or decrements the number of burstpulse spectra that are averaged together to create the plot.  The countranges from one (no averaging) to 25, and is reported on the TTY as“Navg”.   Z/z The “Z” command zooms (i.e. shifts on a logarithmic scale) in 1.0-dBsteps the amplitude of the burst pulse spectra.  This is useful when theoverall 70dB plot span is not sufficient to hold the full range.  Zoomcan also be used to line up the burst spectrum with the filter responseso that the two can be compared.  The zoom level is not printed on theTTY because there is nothing useful that could be done with it. <space> The space bar alternates among three choices for the type of spectrathat are plotted: 1) FIR frequency response, 2) Burst pulse spectrum,and 3) Both.%In dual-receiver mode, the “%” command toggles between eachreceiver.  The printed status line is prefixed with ”Rx:Pri” or ”Rx:Sec”according to which receiver is selected.  Specifically, typing “%” willtoggle the plot of the FIR filter’s frequency response, and the printoutof its DC–Gain.  However, the plotted spectrum and printed powerlevels are always based on the sum of all input signals, and thus do notchange with “%“.4.5.3  TTY Information Lines Within “Ps”The TTY information lines will resemble:Navg:3, FIR:1.33usec (48 Taps), BW:1.000, MHz, DC–Gain:ZEROFreq:30.027 MHz, Pwr:–64.2 dBm, Loss:1.2dB, AFC:23.05% (Manual) Navg Indicates the number of burst spectra that are averaged together priorto plotting.  Larger amounts of averaging increase the ability to seesubtle spectral components, but the display will update more slowly.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–16   FIR Indicates the length of the impulse response of the matched FIR filter.See description on Page 4–8.   BW Indicates the actual 3dB bandwidth of the matched filter.  This is thecomplete width of the passband from the lower frequency edge toupper frequency edge.  Note that the filter’s center frequency is fixedat the radar’s intermediate frequency, as chosen in the “Mb” setupcommand.DC-Gain Indicates the filter’s response to DC (zero frequency) input.  The valueis a negative number in decibels, or the word “ZERO” if the filter hasa true zero at DC.  The filter’s DC gain should be kept at a minimumso that fixed offsets in the A/D converters will not propagate into thesynthesized “I” and “Q” values.  Freq Indicates the mean frequency of the burst.  See description on Page4–8.   Pwr Indicates the average power in the full burst sample window.  Seedescription on Page 4–9.Loss The filter loss is a positive number in deciBels, and is only displayedif the overall burst power exceeds the minimum valid burst thresholdset in the Mb command (clearly, it would not be possible to computethe filter loss when the burst waveform is missing).  The filter loss isdiscussed further in Section 4.5.4.   AFC Indicates the level and status of the AFC  voltage at the RVP8/IFDmodule.  The number is the present output level in D-Units rangingfrom –100 to +100.  The shorter “%” symbol is used since percentageunits correspond in a natural way to the D-Units.An additional number in square brackets will be printed to the right ofthe AFC level to show the encoded bit pattern which corresponds tothat level.  This will only appear when the RVP8 deduces that a specialdigital format is being used, i.e., when the backpanel phase-out lineshave been configured for AFC, or when any of the following are nottrue: a) the low and high numeric AFC span is –32768 to +32767, b)the uplink is enabled, c) the uplink format is binary, and d) pinmapprotocol is OFF.  Binary format is printed in base-10, BCD format isprinted in Hex, and 8B4D format is printed with the low 16-bits (fourBCD digits) in Hex and the upper bits in base-10.The AFC mode is shown to the right of the numerical value(s), andcan take on the following states.(Disabled) Indicates that neither AFC nor MFC are enabled.  Theoutput voltage remains fixed at 0% (center of its range).(Manual) Manual Frequency Control (MFC) is overriding AFC.The “U” and “D” commands can be used to slew thevoltage up and down.Whenever any of the following four states appears, it implies that AFCis enabled and that MFC is disabled.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–17(NoBurst) The energy in the burst is below the minimum energythreshold for a valid pulse (See Page 3–26).  The AFCloop remains idle.(Wait) The burst pulse has become valid just recently, but theAFC loop is idle until the transmitter stabilizes (SeePage 3–27)(Track) The burst pulse is valid, and the AFC loop is trackingin order to bring the burst frequency within the innerhysteresis limits.(Locked) The burst pulse is valid and the AFC loop is locked.The burst frequency is now within the outer hysteresislimits and has previously been within the inner limitswhile tracking.  This is the stable operational mode inwhich data acquisition should take place.4.5.4  Computation of Filter LossThe Ps printout displays the power loss (calibration error) that results when the given filter isapplied to the given transmit burst waveform.  This allows you to correct for the differencebetween what a broad-band power meter measures as the overall transmit power, and what theRVP8 narrow-band receiver will detect within its passband.  The filter loss is a subtle quantitythat depends on the combined characteristics of both the transmit waveform and the receivermatched filter.The filter loss is zero if the burst waveform consists of a pure sinusoid at the designatedintermediate frequency.  It is also very near zero as long as most of the burst energy is confinedwithin the passband of the RVP8’s filter.  The filter loss will increase as the bandwidth of theburst waveform increases and begins to spill out of that passband.  Typical losses for awell-matched filter are in the 0.5–1.8dB range, depending on the FIR length and other designcriteria.As an example, consider how the RVP8 filters would respond to a simple rectangular pulse ofenergy lasting To seconds.  For this discussion we can ignore the sinusoidal IF carrier that mustalso be present within the pulse, and just focus on the rectangular envelope.  This is validbecause the signal bandwidth, and hence the filter loss, is determined entirely by the shape of themodulation envelope.  For a pulse of length To to have unit-energy it must have an amplitude of1ńToǸ .  By centering this pulse at time zero the power spectrum is easily computed using areal-valued integral:S(f)+ȧȧȡȢŕToń2–Toń21ToǸcos( 2pft)dt ȧȧȣȤ2+sin2(pfTo)p2f2Towhere f is the frequency in Hertz.  This is the familiar “synch” function, whose main frequencylobe extends from –1ńTo to 1ńTo Hertz, and whose total power integrated over all frequenciesis 1.0.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–18We can now examine what the filter loss (dBloss ) would be if this pulse were applied to abandpass filter.  The filter loss is simply the ratio of the power that is passed by the filter, dividedby the total input power (1.0 in this case).  Assume for the moment that the filter is an idealbandpass filter centered at zero Hertz (corresponding to how S(f) was defined) and having abandwidth Bw, then:dBloss +–10 log10ȧȧȡȢŕBwń2–Bwń2S(f)df ȧȧȣȤThis integral can be computed for a few “interesting” filter bandwidths, yielding filter losses of0.44dB, 1.11dB, and 3.31dB when Bw is 2ńTo, 1ńTo, and 1ń2To respectively.  These threeexample bandwidths correspond to filters that pass the entire main frequency lobe, half of thatlobe, and one quarter of it.You can experimentally verify these results using the RVP8 as follows:SUsing the Mt0 command, setup a To+0.5 msec trigger pulse from the RVP8 inthe vicinity of range zero, and use that trigger to gate a signal generator whoseoutput is applied to the RVP8/IFD Burst Input.  Also setup 125-meter rangeresolution, and a rather long 6.0 msec impulse response length.  The long lengthwill make the transition edges of the matched filter as steep as possible, so that itbecomes a reasonably good approximation to the ideal bandpass filter used in theabove analysis.SUse the Pb command to verify that the burst pulse is present, and position thetriggers left and right until the pulse is centered exactly at zero.SUse the Ps command to examine the frequency spectrum of the pulse.  Youshould see a main energy lobe that is 4MHz wide and centered at the radar’s IF.There should also be weaker lobes spaced 2MHz apart on both sides of the mainlobe.  If the lobe spacing does not look quite right, it may be because the signalgenerator has slightly shortened or lengthened the trigger gate.SContinue using Ps to examine filters that are 4MHz, 2MHz, and 1MHz wide attheir 3dB points. You should see filter losses reported that are very close to thetheoretical values for the ideal bandpass filter.In the above analysis we have assumed that S(f) is the idealized power spectrum of a continuoustime signal.  Of course, the RVP8 filter loss algorithm can only work from an estimate of S(f)that is obtained from a finite number of samples.  The filter loss calculation thus becomes morecomplicated than the above example in which we integrated an idealized filter response over anidealized power spectrum.Let B^(f) denote the estimated power spectrum of the continuous-time Tx burst waveform, forwhich we have only a finite number of discrete samples {bn}.  For purposes of this discussionwe can assume that the frequency variable f  is continuous.  Furthermore, let C^(f) denote a
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–19power spectrum estimate that is derived in an identical manner using the same number ofsamples, but of a pure sine wave at the radar’s IF.  The RVP8 determines B^(f) according to itssampled measurement of the transmitted waveform; however it can calculate C^(f) internallybased on an idealized sinusoid.  The reported filter loss is then:dBloss +–10 log10ȧȧȧȧȡȢŕ|H(f)|2B^(f)dfŕB^(f)dfBŕ|H(f)|2C^(f)dfŕC^(f)dfȧȧȧȧȣȤWhere |H(f)|2 is the spectral response of the RVP8 IF filter, and the integrals are performed overthe Nyquist frequency band that is implied by the RVP8/IFD sampling rate.  Note that the twointegrals involving C^(f) will have constant value and need only be computed once.  They serveto normalize the B^(f) integrals in such a way that the filter loss evaluates to 0dB whenever thetransmit burst is a pure tone at IF.This normalization is necessary for the filter loss values to be meaningful.  Regardless of thebandwidth and center frequency of H(f), the filter loss should be reported as 0dB whenever theTx waveform appears to have zero spectral width, i.e., is indistinguishable from a pure IFsinusoid.  Of course, the real Tx waveform has only finite duration, and thus should never looklike a pure tone as long as the RVP8 is able to “see” the entire Tx envelope.  For this reason, it isimportant that the filter’s impulse response length be set long enough (using the Pb plot) toinsure that all of the details of the Tx waveform are being captured.  If the entire Tx envelopedoes not fit within the FIR filter, then the filter loss will be underestimated because the Txspectrum will appear to be narrower than it really is.The RVP8’s calculation of digital filter loss is very similar to how the loss of an analog filterwould be measured on a test bench.  Suppose we are given an analog bandpass filter and areasked to determine its spectral loss when a given waveform is presented.  We could use a powermeter to measure the waveform power before and after the filter is inserted, and compute theratio of these two numbers.  This corresponds to the first integral ratio in the above equation.However, this is not by itself an accurate measure of filter loss because it does not take intoaccount the bandwidth-independent insertion loss.  Put another way, a flat 3dB pad would seemto produce a 3dB filter loss in the above measurement, but that is certainly not the result that wedesire.  The remedy is to make a second pair of power measurements of the filter’s response to aCW tone at the passband center.  This serves to calibrate the gain of the filter, and allows us tocompute a filter loss that captures the effects of spectral shape independent of overall gain.  Thisnormalization step corresponds to the second integral ratio in the above equation.If your radar calibration was performed using CW waveforms, then the reported filter lossshould either be added to the receiver calibration losses, or subtracted from the effective transmitpower; the net result being that dBZ0 will increase slightly.In dual-receiver systems the filter loss is computed for the primary and secondary channels usingonly the portion of bandwidth that is allocated to that channel.  For example, if the two IFs are24MHz and 30MHz, then the filter losses for each channel would use the frequency intervals
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–2021–27MHz and 27–33MHz respectively.  This is necessary to avoid picking up energy from theother receiver and interpreting it as out-of-band input power.  A consequence, however, is thatthe real out-of-band power is underestimated, i.e., the filter loss itself is underestimated.  Werecommend temporarily switching dual-receiver systems back to single-receiver mode when thefilter loss is being measured.  This is easily done by changing the Mc setup question back to“single”, and disconnecting the secondary burst input to the RVP8/IFD.4.5.5  Recommended Adjustment ProceduresThe Ps command should be used only after the burst pulse has been successfully captured byway of the Pb command.  Use the <space> key to display the burst spectrum plot by itself, anduse the “Z” key to shift the entire graph into view.  You are now looking at the actual frequencycontent of the transmitted pulse.  The plot should show a clean main power lobe centered at thereceiver’s intermediate frequency.  Check the spectrum for spurious harmonics, excessive width,and other out-of-band noise.  Make any adjustments in the transmitter that might give a sharpermain lobe or reduced spurious noise.Once we know the power spectrum of the transmitted pulse we can begin designing the matchedFIR filter.  Use the <space> key to display both the filter response and the burst spectrum on thesame plot.  Use the “Z” key to shift the burst’s main lobe up to the top horizontal line of thegraph.  This makes it level with the filter’s peak lobe, which is always drawn tangent to the sametop line.Figure 4–4: Example of a Poorly Matched FilterBegin with the FIR length that was chosen previously in the Pb command, and use the “N” and“W” keys to set an initial bandwidth equal to the reciprocal of the pulsewidth.  The main lobesof the two plots should more-or-less overlap.  Experiment with changing the FIR length andbandwidth to achieve a filter with the following properties.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–21SThe filter width should be no greater than the burst spectral width.  A widerpassband will reduce the SNR of the received signal because out-of-band noisewould be allowed to pass.SThe DC gain should be as small as possible, preferably less than –64dB (Seediscussion below).SIf there are conspicuous interference spikes at particular frequencies, try to adjustthe location of the filter’s zeros so that the interference is maximally attenuated.The filter should not pass any frequencies that do not actually contain useful information fromthe original transmitted pulse.  If anything, choose a filter whose width is slightly narrower thanthe burst’s spectral width.  Figure 4–4 shows an example of a filter that is poorly matched to thepulse.  Although the filter has fairly good DC rejection, it passes frequencies that are outside ofthe transmitter’s broadcast range.  These frequencies contribute nothing but noise to thesynthesized “I” and “Q” data stream.There are two procedures for optimizing the performance of the FIR filter:SManual Method –– The process of arriving at a nearly optimal filter willrequire a few minutes of hunting with the “I”, “W”, and “N” keys.  Every timeyou press any of these keys the RVP8 designs a new FIR filter from scratch, anddisplays the results.  Fortunately, the DSP chips are fast enough that this can bedone quickly and interactively.  Even though the user must still control twodegrees of freedom (length and bandwidth), the RVP8’s internal designcalculations are actually performing several hundred iterative steps each time,which preferentially select for the best filter.  Because the FIR coefficients arequantized in the filter chips themselves, the process of finding an optimal filterbecomes quite nonlinear.SAutomatic Method –– Simply type the “$” command and let the RVP8 do allof the work (See description in Section 4.5.2).The offset error of the RVP8/IFD’s A/D converter is at most 10mV, i.e., –27dBm into its 50Winput.  If we wish to achieve 85-dB of dynamic range below the converter’s +4dBm saturationlevel, then we expect usable “I” and “Q” values to be obtainable from a (sub-LSB) input signalat –81dBm.  This is 54dB below the interference that would result from the worst-case A/Doffset.  But a weak input signal at –81dBm would still be damaged by even an equal level of DCinterference.  Therefore, adding another 10dB safety margin, we get –64dB as the recommendedmaximum DC gain of the matched filter.  This DC gain should be reduced even further if it isknown that coherent leakage is present in the receive signal at a level greater than the –27dBmworse-case A/D offset.Figure 4–5 shows a 30MHz filter with particularly poor (–42dB) DC rejection.  The frequencyrange of the plot is 18MHz–36MHz; hence, DC appears aliased at the right edge.  Not only isthere a peak in the filter’s stopband at DC, but it is the largest stopband peak anywhere in theplot.  Contrast this with the filter shown in Figure 4–3 that has a true zero at DC.  In general, apoor filter can be converted into a “nearby” good filter by making only incremental changes tothe impulse response length and/or desired bandwidth.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–22Figure 4–5: Example of a Filter With Poor DC Rejection
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–234.6  Pr — Plot Receiver WaveformsThe “Pb” and “Ps” commands described in the previous sections have been used to analyze thesignal that is applied to the “Burst-In” connector of the RVP8/IFD receiver module.  The taskthat remains is to checkout the actual received signal that is connected to “IF-In”.  The goal is toverify that the received signal is clean and appropriately scaled, and that nearby targets can beseen clearly.  The “Pr” command is used to make these measurements.4.6.1  Interpreting the Receiver Waveform PlotsAn example of a plot from the Pr command is shown in Figure 4–6.  The horizontal axisrepresents time (range) starting from a selectable offset and spanning a selectable interval.  Thedata are acquired from a single transmitted pulse, are are plotted both as raw IF samples and asthe LOG of the detected power using the FIR filter for the current pulsewidth.Figure 4–6: Example of Combined IF Sample and LOG PlotThe IF samples are plotted on a linear scale as signed quantities, with zero appearing at thecenter line of the scope.  Any DC offset that may be present in the A/D converter is notremoved, and will be seen as a shift in the baseline at higher zoom levels.  For example, theconverter’s worst case DC offset of 10mv would appear as a 91-count offset in the 12-bit rangespanning –2048 to +2047.  At the x32 or higher zoom scales, this offset would peg the sampleplot off scale.  Typically the DC offset will be much less than this worst case value;  but theRVP8 preserves the DC term in the Pr sample plot so that its presence is not forgotten.The “AC” amplitude of the IF samples will increase wherever targets are present.  On top ofthese samples is drawn the detected power on a logarithmic scale.  Each horizontal linerepresents a 10dB change in power.  The graph is scaled so that the LOG power reaches the topdisplay line when the samples occupy the full amplitude span.  Using Figure 4–6 as an example,
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–24the two equal-power targets just to the left of center are approximately 18dB down from the top.The amplitude of the samples is thus 10(*18ń20) +0.13, i.e., 13% of full scale.  Thiscorrespondence between the LOG scale and the amplitude scale applies regardless of the plot’szoom level.  As the IF samples are zoomed up and down by factors of two, the LOG plot willshift up and down in 6dB steps.The LOG plot is obtained by convoluting the FIR filter coefficients with the raw IF datasamples, and then plotting log(I2)Q2) at each possible offset along the sampling interval.This convolution produces only (1 + N – I) output points, where N is the number of samplepoints and I is the length of the FIR filter.  For this reason the LOG plot begins approximatelyI/2 samples from left side and ends approximately I/2 samples from the right.The LOG points are computed at each possible offset within the raw IF samples.  At the nominal35.975MHz sampling rate the spacing between LOG samples will be a mere 8.33 meters.  Thus,the LOG plot gives a very detailed view of received power versus range.  Of course, successiveLOG points will be highly correlated because successive input data intervals differ by only onesample point.  This is why the LOG plots appear smooth compared to the instantaneous variationof the raw IF samples.As the starting offset of the Pr plot is decreased to range zero you will begin to see part of theburst pulse (the second half of it) appear at the left edge of the plot.  This is because the burstdata samples are multiplexed onto the same fiber cable that carries the IF data samples.  Zerorange is defined to occur at the center of the burst window; hence, the later half of the burstpulse will be visible when the plot begins at range zero.A second type of Pr display is shown in Figure 4–7.  This plot shows a frequency spectrum ofthe received data samples in a format that is nearly identical to the Ps display.  The horizontalaxis represents the same band of frequencies (half the sampling rate), and the vertical axisrepresents power in 10dB steps.  The entire vertical axis is used so that an overall span of 80dBis visible.  This particular plot was made with the time span set to 50 msec, and with a 1-meterantenna attached to the IF input so that a broad range of signals (radio stations, electrical noise,etc.) would be detected.The purpose of the Pr power spectrum is to check for spurious interference in the IF signal fromthe radar receiver.  The spectrum should be viewed with the transmitter turned off, and with thestarting range moved out so that the burst samples are not mixed in with the receiver data.  Thepower spectrum is computed using the complete interval of raw IF samples which, depending onthe chosen time span, may contain many hundreds of points.  The frequency resolution of the Prspectrum can therefore be quite fine; making it possible to discern any interfering frequencieswith some detail.The Pr spectrum plot will properly show a 0-Hz peak from any DC offset in the A/D converter,and is thus consistent with how the DC offset is presented in the Pr sample plot.  Both of theseplots preserve the DC component of the IF samples so that it can be monitored as part of theroutine maintenance of the receiver system.  This is one of the few places in the RVP8 menusand processing algorithms where the DC term deliberately remains intact.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–25Figure 4–7: Example of a Noisy High Resolution “Pr” Spectrum4.6.2  Available Subcommands Within “Pr”The list of subcommands is printed on the TTY:Available Subcommands within ’Pr’:  L/l & R/r  Start range Left/Right     T/t     Plot time span Up/Dn     V/v     Number of spectra averaged     Z/z     Amplitude zoom   <space>   Alternate Plots      %      Toggle between dual receivers      .      Single StepThese subcommands change the start time and span of the IF sampling window, and alter theformat of the display.L/l & R/r The “L” and “R” commands shift left and right the starting point ofthe window of IF samples.  The lower case commands shift in 0.25msec steps, and the upper case commands use 10 msec steps.  Thestarting point is displayed both in microseconds and kilometers on theTTY, and is not allowed to be set earlier than range zero.    T/t The “T” command increments or decrements the time duration of thewindow of IF samples.  The window is not allowed to become shorterthan the impulse response length of the FIR filter, since that wouldpreclude calculating even a single LOG power point.  The value isreported in microseconds on the TTY, and the largest permitted span is50 msec.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–26    V/v The “V” command increments or decrements the number of powerspectra that are averaged together to create the plot.  The count rangesfrom one (no averaging) to 25, and is reported on the TTY as “Navg”.    Z/z The “Z” command zooms the amplitude of the IF samples by factorsof two from one to 128.  The LOG plots are shifted in corresponding6dB increments as the amplitude is zoomed up and down.  The zoomlevel is reported on the TTY so that absolute power levels and A/Dusage can be assessed. <space> The  space bar alternates among three choices for the type of data thatare plotted: 1) Received Samples, 2) Received Samples and LOGPower, and 3) Received Power Spectrum.%In dual-receiver mode, the “%” command toggles between eachreceiver.  The printed status line is prefixed with ”Rx:Pri” or ”Rx:Sec”according to which receiver is selected.  Specifically, typing “%” willtoggle the LOG plot of the received power, and the printout of the“Total”, “Filtered”, and “Midpoint” powers.  However, the plots ofpower spectra and raw IF data samples are always based on the sum ofall input signals, and thus do not change with “%”.4.6.3  TTY Information Lines Within “Pr”The TTY information lines will resemble:Zoom:x1,  Navg:4,  Start:0.00 usec (0.00 km),  Span:5 usecTotal:–63.3 dBm,  Filtered:–77.6 dBm,  MidSamp:–77.4 dBm  Zoom Indicates the magnification (in amplitude) of the plotted samples.  Azoom level of “x1” means that a full scale A/D waveform exactly fillsthe vertical height of the plot.  Generally, the IF signal strength willnot be quite this high.  Thus, use larger zoom levels to see the weakersamples more clearly.  You may zoom in powers of two up to x128.  Navg Indicates the number of spectra and/or LOG powers that are averagedtogether prior to plotting.  Larger amounts of averaging increase theability to observe subtleties of the signals, but the display will updatemore slowly.Start Indicates the starting time of the IF sample window relative to rangezero.  The time is shown both in microseconds and in kilometers.Span Indicates the time span of the IF sample window in microseconds.Total Indicates the total RMS power that is being detected by the IF-InputA/D converters.  This total is computed using all of the raw IF samplesin the chosen interval, and is the sum of power at all frequencies otherthan 0 Hz (and its aliases).Filtered Indicates the RMS power that falls only within the passband of theFIR filter for the current pulsewidth.  This is computed using all of theraw IF samples in the chosen interval.
Plot–Assisted SetupsRVP8 User’s ManualApril 20034–27MidSamp Also indicates the RMS power within the passband of the FIR filter,but using only the raw IF samples in the exact center of the choseninterval.The computation of “Total Power” is performed using the same subset of central IF samples thatare used to compute “Filtered Power”.  This smaller subset of IF samples comes about becausefiltering the data requires a convolution with the current FIR filter, and this computation doesnot produce results all the way to the edges of the input data.  This is the same reason that theLOG plots do not extend across the full screen.Because of this definition, it is valid to intercompare the “Total Power” and “Filtered Power”.The two numbers will match exactly as long as all of the incoming power falls within thepassband of the FIR filter.  The difference between the two powers can be used as a measure ofthe “filter loss” for a given pulse shape, i.e., the portion of signal that is lost outside of thefilter’s passband.Note: The “Total”, “Filtered”, and “MidSamp” values represent true RMSpower (i.e., variance), and not merely a sum-of-squares.  Thus, any DC offsetpresent in the A/D converter will not affect these power levels.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–15.  Processing Algorithms (draft)This draft chapter is based on the legacy RVP7 algorithms. The RVP8 will have someadditional features and may not contain some of the legacy features.This chapter describes the real-time data processing algorithms implemented within the RVP8signal processor. The discussion is confined to the mathematical description of these algorithms.Figure 5–1 shows the overall process by which the RVP8 converts the IF signal into correctedreflectivity, velocity, and width.  Table 5–1 summarizes the quantities that are measured andcomputed by the RVP8.  The type of the quantity (i.e., real or complex) is also given. Subscriptsare sometimes used to denote successive samples in time from a given range bin. For example, sndenotes the “I” and “Q” video sample from the n’th pulse from a given range bin. In cases whereit is obvious, the subscripts denoting the pulse (time) are dropped. The descriptions of all thedata processing algorithms are phrased in terms of the operations performed on data from asingle range bin — identical processing then being applied at all of the selected ranges. Thus,there is no need to include a range subscript in this data notation.It is frequently convenient to combine two simultaneous samples of “I” and “Q” into a singlecomplex number (called a phaser) of the form:s+I)jQwhere “j” is the square root of –1. Most of the algorithms presented in this chapter are defined interms of the operations performed on the “s”’s, rather than the “i”’s and “q”’s. The use of thecomplex terms leads to a more concise mathematical expression of the signal processingtechniques being used. In actual operation, the complex arithmetic is simply broken down intoits real-valued component parts in order to be computed by the RVP8 hardware. For example,the complex product:s+W Yis computed asReal{s}+Real{W}Real{Y}*Imag{W}Imag{Y}Imag{s}+Real{W}Imag{Y})Imag{W}Real{Y}where “Real{}” and “Imag{}” represent the real and imaginary parts of their complex-valuedargument. Note that all of the expanded computations are themselves real-valued.In addition to the usual operations of addition, subtraction, division, and multiplication ofcomplex numbers, we employ three additional unary operators: “||”, “Arg” and “*”. Given anumber “s” in the complex plane, the magnitude (or modulus) of s is equal to the length of thevector joining the origin with “s”, i.e.|s|+ǒReal{s}2)Imag{s}2Ǔ1ń2
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–2The signed (CCW positive) angle made between the positive real axis and the above vector is:ë+Arg{s}+arctanƪImag{s}Real{s}ƫwhere this angle lies between *p  and )p  and the signs of Real{s} and Imag {s} determinethe proper quadrant. Note that this angle is real, and is uniquely defined as long as |s| isnon-zero. When |s| is equal to zero, Arg{s} is undefined. Finally, the “complex conjugate” of “s”is that value obtained by negating the imaginary part of the number, i.e.,s*+Real{s}*jImag{s}.Note that Arg{s*} = –Arg{s}. The reader is referred to any introductory text on complexnumbers for clarification of these points.Table 5–1: Algebraic Quantities Within the RVP8 ProcessorpInstantaneous IF-receiver data sample RealbInstantaneous Burst-pulse data sample RealI,QInstantaneous quadrature receiver components Reals Instantaneous time series phaser value ComplexsȀTime series after clutter filter ComplexT0Zeroth lag autocorrelation of A values RealR0Zeroth lag autocorrelation of AȀ values RealR1First lag autocorrelation of AȀ values ComplexR2Second lag autocorrelation of AȀ values ComplexSQI Signal Quality Index RealV Mean velocity RealW Spectrum Width RealCCOR Clutter correction RealLOG Signal to noise ratio for thresholding RealSIG Signal power of weather RealC Clutter power RealN Noise power RealZCorrected Reflectivity factor RealTUnCorrected Reflectivity factor Real
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–3Speckle RemoverThresholdingCalibrate MomentsRange AveragingMicro Clutter SuppressiondBZ dBT V WV W SQI SIG CCORSIGTHLOGTHSQITHCCORTHFLAGSdBZ       dBTK–binsNldBZ0aCCORTHCorrelate CorrelateFilterR0 R1 (R2) T0siMM36 MHzFigure 5–1: Flow Diagram of RVP8 ProcessingThis  step  difĆfers  for  FFTand Pulse PairModesCalculate Output DataIFFIRDecimatein TimeA/D36 MHzBurstFFTComputeFrequencyA/DD/AAFC
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–45.1  IF Signal Processing The starting point for all computations within the RVP8 are the instantaneous IF-receiversamples pn and, the instantaneous burst-pulse or COHO reference samples bn.  These data areavailable at a very high sampling rate (typically 36MHz), which makes possible the digitalimplementation of functions that are traditionally performed by discrete components in ananalog receiver.  The RVP8’s all-digital approach replaces a great deal of analog hardware,avoids problems of aging and maintenance, and makes it easy to tune-up the receiver and alterits parameters.This section describes these IF signal processing steps.5.1.1  FIR (Matched) FilterThe RVP8 implements a digital version of the “matched” filter that is found in the traditionalanalog radar receiver.  The equivalent Finite-Impulse-Response (FIR) filter is designed using aninteractive graphical procedure described in Section 4.5.  The filter length (number of taps),center frequency, and bandwidth are all adjustable.  The design procedure computes two sets offilter coefficients  fin and  fqn such that the instantaneous quadrature samples at a given bin are:I+ȍN*1n+0fin pn,Q+ȍN*1n+0fqn pnwhere N is the length of the filter.  The input samples  pn are centered on the range bin to whichthe (I,Q) pair is assigned.  Note that some of the  pn are likely to overlap among adjacent bins,i.e., the filter length may be chosen to be greater than the bin spacing.  Such an overlapintroduces a slight correlation between successive bins, but the longer length allows a betterfilter to be designed.The convolution sums for I and Q are computed on the RVP8/Main board using dedicated FIRchips that can perform up to 576 million sums of products per second.  The  pn are representedas 16-bit signed integers, and the  fin and  fqn are represented as 10-bit signed integers.  Anumerical optimization procedure is used to quantize the ideal filter coefficients into their 10-bithardware values.  The overall spectral purity of the FIR filter will typically be greater than66dBc.The reference phase for each transmitted pulse is computed using the same two FIR sums,except with bn substituted for the  pn.  For a magnetron system the  Nbn samples are centeredon the transmitted burst; for a klystron system they are obtained from the CW COHO.  If theklystron is phase modulated, then the samples should be from the modulated COHO.The fin coefficients are computed as:fin+ln sinƪp4)2pfIFfSAMP ǒn*N*12Ǔƫ,n+0AAA N*1
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–5where fIF  is the radar intermediate frequency,  fSAMP  is the RVP8/IFD crystal samplingfrequency, and ln are the coefficients of an N-point symmetric low-pass FIR filter that ismatched to the bandwidth of the transmitted pulse.  The multiplication of the ln terms by thesin() terms effectively converts to the low-pass filter to a band-pass filter centered at the radar IF.The formula for the  fqn coefficients is identical except that sin() is replaced with cos().The phase of the sinusoid terms, and the symmetry of the ln terms, has been carefully chosen tohave a valuable overall symmetry property when n is replaced with (N–1)–n, i.e., the sequence isreversed:fi(N*1)*n+l(N*1)*n sinƪp4)2pfIFfSAMP ǒ((N*1) *n)*N*12Ǔƫfi(N*1)*n+ln cosƪp4)2pfIFfSAMP ǒn*N*12Ǔƫfi(N*1)*n+fqnThus, the coefficients needed to compute I are merely the reversal of the coefficients needed tocompute Q; if you know  fin, then you also know  fqn.  This is why it is sufficient to print onlyone set of FIR coefficients during the filter design process described in Section 4.5.5.1.2  Automatic Frequency Control (AFC)AFC is used on magnetron systems to tune the STALO to compensate for magnetron frequencydrift. The STALO is typically tuned 30 MHz away from the magnetron frequency.  Themaximum tuning range of the AFC feedback is approximately 7MHz on each side of the centerfrequency.  This assumes that the system’s IF frequency is at least 4MHz away from anymultiple of half the digital sampling frequency, i.e., 18, 36, 54, or 72MHz.The RVP8 analyzes the burst pulse samples from each pulse, and produces a running estimate ofthe power-weighted center frequency of the transmitted waveform.  This frequency estimate isthe basis of the RVP8’s AFC feedback loop, whose purpose is to maintain a fixed intermediatefrequency from the radar receiver.The instantaneous frequency estimate is computed using four autocorrelation lags from each setof Nbn samples.  This estimate is valid over the entire Nyquist interval (e.g., 18MHz to36MHz), but becomes noisy within 10% of each end.  Since the span of the burst pulse samplesis only approximately a microsecond, several hundred estimates must be averaged together to getan estimate that is accurate to several kiloHertz.  Thus, the AFC feedback loop will typicallyhave a time constant of several seconds or more.Most of the burst pulse analysis routines, including the AFC feedback loop, are inhibited fromrunning immediately after making a pulsewidth change.  The center-of-mass calculations areheld off according to the value of  Settling time (to 1%) of burst frequency estimator, and theAFC loop is held off by the Wait time before applying AFC.  This prevents introducing transientsinto the burst analysis algorithms each time the pulsewidth changes.Additional information about using AFC can be found in Sections 2.2.10, 2.4, and 3.3.6.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–65.1.3  Burst Pulse TrackingThe RVP8 has the ability to track the power-weighted center-of-mass of the burst pulse, and toautomatically shift the trigger timing so that the pulse remains in the center of the burst analysiswindow of the Pb plot.  This means that external sources of drift in the timing of the transmittedpulse (temperature, aging, etc.) will be tracked and nulled out during normal operation; so thatfixed targets will remain fixed in range, and clean Tx phase measurements will always beavailable on every pulse.The Burst Pulse Tracker feedback loop makes changes to the trigger timing in response to themeasured position of the burst.  Timing changes will generally be made only when the RVP8 isnot actively acquiring data, in the same way that AFC feedback is held off for similar “quiet”times.  However, if the center-of-mass has drifted more than 1/3 the width of the burst analysiswindow, then the timing adjustment will be made right away.  Also, there will be anapproximately 5ms interruption in the normal trigger sequence whenever any timing changes aremade.The Burst Pulse Tracker and AFC feedback loop are each fine-tuning servos that keep the burstpulse “centered” in time and frequency.  These servos have been expanded to include acombined “Hunt Mode” that will track down a missing burst pulse when we are uncertain ofboth its time and frequency.  This coarse-tuning mode is especially valuable for initializing thetwo fine-tuning servos in radar systems that drift significantly with time and temperature.When the radar transmitter is On but the burst pulse is missing, it may be because either of thefollowing have happened:SIt is misplaced in time, i.e., the Tx pulse is outside of the window displayed in thePb plotting command.  In this case, the trigger timing needs to be changed inorder to bring the center of the pulse back to the center of the window.SIt is mistuned in frequency, i.e., the AFC feedback is incorrect and has caused theburst frequency to fall outside of the passband of the RVP8 anti-alias filters.  Inthis case the AFC (or DAFC) needs to be changed so that proper tuning isrestored.The Hunt Mode performs a 2-dimensional search in time and frequency to locate the burst;searching across a +20msec time window, and across the entire AFC span.  If a valid Tx pulse(i.e., meeting the minimum power requirement) can be found anywhere within those intervalsthen the Burst Pulse Tracker and AFC loops will be initialized with the time and frequencyvalues that were discovered.  The fine servos then commence running with a good burst signalstarting from those initial points.Depending on how the hunting process has been configured in the Mb menu, the wholeprocedure may take several seconds to complete.  The RVP8’s host computer interface remainscompletely functional during this time, but any acquired data would certainly be questionable.GPARM status bits in word #55 indicate when the hunt procedure is running, and whether it hascompleted successfully.  The BPHUNT (Section 6.25) opcode allows the host computer toinitiate Hunt Mode when it knows or can sense that a burst pulse should be present
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–75.1.4  Interference FilterThe interference filter is an optional processing step that can be applied to the raw (I,Q) samplesthat emerge from the FIR filter chips.  The intention of the filter is to remove strong but sporadicinterfering signals that are occasionally received from nearby man-made sources.  The techniquerelies on the statistics of such interference being noticeably different from that of weather.For each range bin at which (I,Q) data are available, the interference filter algorithm uses thereceived power (in deciBels) from the three most recent pulses:Pn*2,Pn*1, and Pnwhere:Pn+10 log10ǒI2n)Q2nǓ .If the three pulse powers have the property that:ŤPn*1*Pn*2ŤtC1   and    ŤPn*Pn*1ŤuC2                          (Alg.1)then (In,Qn)  is replaced by (In*1,Qn*1).  Here C1 and C2 are constants that can be tuned bythe user to match the type of interference that is anticipated, and the error rates that can betolerated.  For certain environments it may be the case that good results can be obtained withC1+C2; but the RVP8 does not force that restriction.This 3-pulse algorithm is only intended to remove interference that arrives on isolated pulses,and for which there are at least two clear pulses in between.  Interference that tends to arrive inbursts will not be rejected.Two variations on the fundamental algorithm are also defined.  The CFGINTF command(Section 6.22) allows you to choose which of these algorithms to use, and to tune the twothreshold constants.  You may also do this directly from the Mp setup menu (Section 3.3.2).ŤPn*1*Pn*2ŤtC1   and    Pn*Pn*1uC2                                (Alg.2)ŤPn*1*Pn*2ŤtC1   and    Pn*LinAvg(Pn*1,Pn*2)uC2     (Alg.3)Where LinAvg() denotes the deciBel value of the linear average of the two deciBel powers.  TheAlg.2 and Alg.3 algorithms also include the receiver noise level(s) as part of their decisioncriteria.  Whenever power levels are intercompared in the algorithms, any power that is less thanthe noise level is first set equal to that noise level.  This makes the filters much more robust andproperly tunable, so that interference is more successfully rejected on top of blank receivernoise.Optimum values for C1 and C2 will vary from site to site, but some guidance can be obtainedusing numerical simulations.  The results shown below were obtained when the algorithms wereapplied to realistic weather time series having a spectrum width = 0.1 (Nyquist), SNR = +10dB,and an intermittent additive interference signal that was 16dB stronger than the weather.  Theinterference arrived in isolated single pulses with a probability of 2%.Performance of the three algorithms is summarized in the first three columns of Table 5–2, forwhich C1 and C2 have the common value shown.  The fourth column also uses Algorithm #3,but with the value of C1 raised by 2dB.  The “Missed” rate is defined as the percentage of
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–8interference points that manage to get through the filtering process without being removed.  The“False” (false alarm) rate is the percentage of non-interference points that are incorrectlymodified when they should have been left alone.Table 5–2: Algorithm Results for +16dB Interference            Alg.1          Alg.2          Alg.3      Alg.3, C1+=2dB C1,C2   Missed/False   Missed/False   Missed/False   Missed/False –––––   ––––––––––––   ––––––––––––   ––––––––––––   –––––––––––– 6.0dB   17.8% 10.91%   17.8%  4.06%   17.8%  3.48%   10.3%  4.15% 8.0dB   10.5%  6.57%   10.5%  2.42%   10.4%  1.71%    6.1%  1.92% 9.0dB    8.5%  5.09%    8.5%  1.81%    8.3%  1.16%    5.4%  1.28%10.0dB    7.3%  4.01%    7.3%  1.42%    7.5%  0.79%    5.4%  0.85%11.0dB    8.9%  3.14%    8.9%  1.06%    8.3%  0.51%    6.5%  0.54%12.0dB   11.6%  2.53%   11.6%  0.85%   11.3%  0.33%    9.9%  0.35%13.0dB   17.0%  2.07%   17.0%  0.67%   16.3%  0.22%   15.3%  0.23%14.0dB   23.5%  1.70%   23.5%  0.54%   22.4%  0.14%   21.6%  0.15%16.0dB   39.2%  1.21%   39.2%  0.35%   39.6%  0.06%   38.9%  0.06%20.0dB   67.3%  0.65%   67.3%  0.14%   72.5%  0.01%   72.4%  0.01%It is important to minimize both types of errors.  If too much interference is missed, then thefilter is not doing an adequate job of cleaning up the received signal.  If the false alarm rate istoo high, then background damage is done at all times and the overall signal quality (especiallysub-clutter visibility) may be compromised.  We suggest that you try to keep the false alarm ratefairly low, perhaps below 1%; and then let the missed percentage fall where it may.To summarize the numerical results in Table 5–2:SThe “Missed” rates of Alg.1 and Alg.2 are identical, but the “False” rate of Alg.1is much higher.  Alg.1 clearly does not perform as well for additive interference,but it is included in the suite for historical reasons.SThe “Missed” error rate for Alg.3 is nearly identical to that of Alg.2, but Alg.3has a significantly lower false alarm rate.  This is because of the somewhatimproved statistics that result when the linear mean of Pn*2 and Pn*1 is used inthe second comparison, rather than just Pn*1 by itself.  We recommend thatAlg.3 generally be chosen in preference to the other two.SAlg.3 can be further tuned by allowing the two constants to differ.  For example,by raising C1 slightly above C2 (fourth column), we can trade off a decrease inthe “Missed” rate for an increase in the “False” rate.  Lowering C1 would havethe opposite effect.Keep in mind that optimum tuning will depend on the type of interference you are trying toremove.  In the previous example, where the interfering signal is only 16dB stronger than theweather, there was a close tradeoff between the “Missed” and “False” error rates.  However,Table 5–3 shows the results that would be obtained if the interference dominates by 26db.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–9Table 5–3: Algorithm Results for +26dB Interference            Alg.1          Alg.2          Alg.3      Alg.3, C2+=5dB C1,C2   Missed/False   Missed/False   Missed/False   Missed/False –––––   ––––––––––––   ––––––––––––   ––––––––––––   –––––––––––– 6.0dB   17.8% 10.75%   17.8%  3.95%   17.8%  3.44%   17.8%  0.34% 8.0dB    9.9%  6.48%    9.9%  2.31%    9.9%  1.68%    9.9%  0.15% 9.0dB    7.4%  4.99%    7.4%  1.75%    7.4%  1.14%    7.4%  0.10%10.0dB    5.9%  3.91%    5.9%  1.36%    5.9%  0.76%    5.9%  0.06%11.0dB    4.8%  3.06%    4.8%  1.06%    4.8%  0.50%    4.8%  0.04%12.0dB    3.2%  2.37%    3.2%  0.83%    3.2%  0.33%    3.2%  0.03%13.0dB    2.6%  1.83%    2.6%  0.62%    2.6%  0.20%    2.8%  0.01%14.0dB    1.9%  1.45%    1.9%  0.50%    1.9%  0.12%    2.6%  0.01%16.0dB    1.3%  0.90%    1.3%  0.30%    1.3%  0.05%    5.8%  0.00%20.0dB    3.1%  0.39%    3.1%  0.12%    2.0%  0.01%   31.5%  0.00%Notice that we can now re-tune the constants and operate with C1+13dB and C2+18dB(fourth column); which yields a low 2.8% “Missed” rate, and an extremely low 0.01% falsealarm rate.  Since the false alarm rate is (approximately) independent of the interference power,these filter settings would leave all “clean” weather virtually untouched, i.e., we would have avery safe filter that is intended only to remove fairly strong interference.  Such a filter could beleft running at all times without too much worry about side effects.5.1.5  Large-Signal LinearizationThe RVP8 is able to recover the signal power of targets that saturate the IF-Input A/D converterby as much as 4–6 deciBels.  This is possible because an overdriven IF waveform still spendssome of its time in the valid range of the converter, and thus, it is still possible to deduceinformation about the signal.Figure 5–2 shows actual signal generator test measurements with normal A/D saturation (lowerline), and with the extrapolation algorithms turned on (upper line).  The high-end linear rangebegins to roll off at approximately +10dBm versus +5dBm, and thus has been extended by 5dB.5.1.6  Correction for Tx Power FluctuationsThe RVP8 can perform pulse-to-pulse amplitude correction of the digital (I,Q) data stream basedon the amplitude of the Burst/COHO input.  The technique computes a (real valued) correctionfactor at each pulse by dividing the mean amplitude of the burst by the instantaneous amplitudeof the burst.  The (I,Q) data for that pulse are then multiplied by this scale factor to obtaincorrected time series.  The amplitude correction is applied after the Linearized SaturationHeadroom correction.The mean burst amplitude is computed by an exponential average whose (1/e) time constant isselected as a number of pulses (See Section 3.3.2).  A short time constant will settle faster, butwill not be as thorough in removing amplitude variations (since the mean itself will be varying).Longer time constants do a better job, but will require a second or two before valid data isavailable when the transmitter is first turned on.  The default value of 70 will give excellentresults in almost all cases.Whenever the RVP8 enters a new internal processing mode (time series, FFT, PPP, etc.), theburst power estimator is reinitialized from the level of the first pulse encountered, and anadditional pipeline delay is introduced to allow the estimator to completely settle.  Thus, valid
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–10–4–3–2–10123456789101112–4–3–2–10123456789101112Figure 5–2: Linearization of Saturated Signals Above +4dBmcorrected data are produced even when the RVP8 is alternating rapidly between different dataacquisition tasks, e.g., in a multi-function ASCOPE display.  The additional pipeline delay willnot affect the high-speed performance when the RVP8 runs continuously in any single mode.For amplitude correction to be applied, the instantaneous Burst/COHO signal level must exceedthe minimum valid burst power specified in the “Mb” setup section.  If that level is not met, e.g.,if the transmitter is turned off, then no correction is performed.  Thus, the amplitude correctionfeature conveniently “gets out of the way” when receiver-only tests are being performed.The maximum correction that will ever be applied is 5dB.  If the burst power in a given pulseis more than 5dB above the mean, or less than 5dB below it, then the correction is clamped atthose limits.  The power variation of a typical transmitter will easily be contained within thisinterval (it is typically less than 0.3dB).Instantaneous amplitude correction is a unique feature of the RVP8 digital receiver.  Bench testswith a signal generator reveal that an amplitude modulated waveform having 2.0dB ofpulse-to-pulse variation is reduced to less than 0.02dB RMS of (I,Q) variation after applying theamplitude correction.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–115.2  Video (“I” and “Q”) Signal ProcessingThis section describes the processing of the video (“I” and “Q”) data to obtain the reducedparameters: reflectivity, total power, velocity, width, signal quality index, clutter powercorrection, and sometimes ZDR.  The RVP8 employs two methods (selectable) for processingthe I and Q signals: pulse-pair and FFT. The methods are similar except in regard to theprocedures for clutter filtering. The pulse pair methods are described below; the FFT clutterfiltering algorithms are described in Section 5.8.5.2.1  Time SeriesRecall that the time series synthesized by the FIR filter consist of an array of complex numbers:sn+[In)jQn]for n+1, 2, 3, AAA,Mwhere “j” is *11ń2.  These data samples are analogous to the “I” and “Q” samples in atraditional analog receiver. They are sampled at a selectable resolution in the range 50–133meters. The time series are the starting point for all calculations performed within the RVP8.5.2.2  IIR Clutter Filter for PPP-ModeThe RVP8’s pulse-pair-processing mode employs a 4th order Infinite Impulse Response (IIR)digital high pass filter to remove low frequency signals due to ground clutter from the timeseries.  Since the width of the clutter can change with the antenna rotation rate, eight differentfilters (seven high-pass, plus one all-pass) are provided. The filter stop-bandwidths vary fromapproximately 2% to 14% of the Nyquist interval, and stop band attenuation is at least 40 dB. Asetup question allows selection of either 40 dB or 50 dB filters.  The 50 dB filters are intendedfor Klystron systems.  Any of the eight filters can be selected independently at each individualrange bin. This permits range-dependent clutter removal. The filter algorithm is outlined below.The input time series sn is processed to form a filtered output time series sȀn as follows:sȀn+B0sn)B1sn*1)B2sn*2)B3sn*3)B4sn*4*C1sȀn*1*C2sȀn*2*C3sȀn*3*C4sȀn*4where the B’s and C’s are the filter coefficients.  Appendix C gives  the magnitude responseplots for the set of filters supplied with the RVP8.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–125.2.3  Autocorrelations for PPP-ModeThe autocorrelations are computed during pulse-pair-processing mode according to thefollowing algorithms (corresponding physical models are also given):Parameter and Definition Physical ModelTo+1MȍMn+1sn*sngrgt(S)C))NRo+1MȍMn+1sȀ*nsȀngrgtS)NR1+1M*1ȍM*1n+1sȀ*nsȀn)1grgtSejpVȀ*p2W2ń2R2+1M*2ȍM*2n+1sȀ*nsȀn)2grgtSej2pVȀ*2p2W2where M is the number of pulses in the time average. Here, sȀ denotes the filtered time series, sdenotes the original unfiltered time series and the * denotes a complex conjugate. gr and gtrepresent the transmitter and receiver gains, i.e., their product represents the total system gain.Since the RVP8 is a linear receiver, there is a single gain number that relates the measuredautocorrelation magnitude to the absolute received power. However, since many of thealgorithms do not require absolute calibration of the power, the gain terms will be ignored in thediscussion of these. To  for the unfiltered time series is proportional to the sum of themeteorological signal S, the clutter power C and the noise power N. R0 is equal to the sum ofthe meteorological signal S and noise power N which is measured directly on the RVP8 byperiodic noise sampling. To and R0 are used for calculating the dBZ values- the equivalent radarreflectivity factor which is a calibrated measurement. The physical models for R0,R1 and R2correspond to a Gaussian weather signal and white noise. W is the spectrum width and V’ themean velocity, both for the normalized Nyquist interval [–1 to 1].The exact value of M that is used for each time average will generally be the “Sample Size” thatis selected by the SOPRM command (See Section 6.3).  However, when the RVP8 is in PPPmode and antenna angle synchronization is enabled, the actual number of pulses used may belimited by the number that fit within each ray’s angular limits at the current antenna scan rate.The value of M will never be greater than the SOPRM Sample Size, but it may sometimes beless.  For example, at 1KHz PRF, 20_/sec scan rate, 1_ ray synchronization, and a Sample Sizeof 80, there will be 50 pulses used for each ray (not 80).  Note, however, that the number ofpulses used in the “batched” (non-PPP) modes will always be exactly equal to the Sample Size,since those modes are allowed to use overlapping pulses.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–135.2.4  Range averaging and Clutter Microsuppression The next step (optional) is to perform range averaging. Range averaging can be performed over2, 3, ..., 16 bins.  This is accomplished by simply averaging the T0,R0,R1 and R2 values.  Thisreduces the number of bins in the final output to save processing both in the RVP8 and in thehost computer.At the user’s option, the range averaged data can be restricted to include only those bins whichhave an estimated clutter-to-signal ratio that falls within the CCOR threshold interval.  Byexcluding isolated point clutter targets from the range average the sub-clutter visibility of theaveraged data is increased.  Specifically, the Doppler test that is applied to each bin in order thatit contribute to the overall sum is:10 log R0*10 log T0uCCORthresh  .5.2.5  Reflectivity The corrected reflectivity Z is output using a log scale based on the following equation:dBZ +10 logƪT0*NNƫ)dBZo)20 log r)ar )CCORThis equation is simply a dB version of the familiar radar equation for distributed targets. Therelationship between the measured autocorrelation function, the received signal and the noise canbe expressed as:To+gtgrS)Nwhere gt  and gr represent the transmitter and receiver gains, S is the average backscatteredpower from the targets and N is the measured average noise power. Neglecting attenuation andthe contribution of ground clutter (for the moment), the radar equation can be written as.Z+CSr2+ƪCr20Ngrgtƫƪr2r2oƫƪTo*NNƫwhere C is the radar constant and ro is a reference range which we will later set to 1 km. This isidentical to the first three terms of the dB version of the equation with the definition that:Zo+Cr2oNgrgt+Cr2oIowhere Io+NgrgtZo is called the calibration reflectivity factor. It is the equivalent radar reflectivity factor at thereference range when the return signal power is equal to the noise power (SNR=0 dB). It issometimes called the minimum detectable dBZ at 1 km. The parameter Io is the measured noisepower at IF with appropriate calibration for the system gain. Calibration of the RVP8 involvesdefining the radar constant C and measuring the value of Io. This is discussed in detail in Section5.4.Essentially, the measurement of Io is based on the measurement of the system noise at the timeof calibration. However, if the receiver gain were to change after calibration, the use of periodicnoise sampling properly corrects for this. For example, if the receiver gain were to change by afactor k, then we would measure a noise value of kN and an autocorrelation value of kTo, i.e.,
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–14Z+CSr2+ƪCr20Ngrgtƫƪr2r2oƫƪkTo*kNkN ƫThus the k’s cancel to give us the same result for Z. This makes the approach robust to systemgain fluctuations. Another way of saying this is that as long as the system sensitivity (noisefigure) does not change, then the system does not require re-calibration.The individual terms in the dB form of the equation are summarized below.1st Term : 10 logƪT0*NNƫ: Signal to Noise RatioThe effect of this term is to subtract the measured noise. It is also used for LOG thresholding.If this number is above the user input value LOGthresh the dBZ is passed.2rd Term: dBZo : Calibration Reflectivity (see discussion above)dBZo is the minimum detectable dBZ at a reference range ro=1 km,3th Term: 20 log r : Range NormalizationThis term is the ƪrroƫ2 range normalization expressed in dB form.4th Term: ar : Gaseous Attenuation CorrectionThis term accounts for gaseous attenuation. The constant a is set in the RVP8 EEROM sinceit is a function of wavelength.  For a C-band system the default value is 0.016 dB per km (fortwo-way path attenuation).5th Term: CCOR: Clutter CorrectionThis term corrects for the measured ground clutter. It’s derivation is discussed in section5.2.9.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–155.2.6  VelocityFor a Doppler power spectrum that is symmetric about its mean velocity, the velocity is obtaineddirectly from the argument of the autocorrelation at the first lag, i.e.,V+l4ptsq1    where    q1+arg NJR1Nj.l is the radar wavelength, ts is the sampling time (1/PRF).  q1 is constrained to be on theinterval [*p,p].   When  q1+" p , then  V+" Vu  where the unambiguous velocity is ,Vu+l4ts .If the absolute value of the true velocity of the scatterers is greater than Vu , then the velocitycalculated by the RVP8 is folded into the interval  ƪ*Vu,Vuƫ , which is called the Nyquistinterval. Folding is usually easily recognized on a color display by a discontinuous jump invelocities. For example, if the true velocity is Vu)DV,  then the velocity calculated by theRVP8 is  *Vu)DV,  which is  2Vu away from the true mean velocity.For 8-bit outputs, rather than calculating the absolute velocity in scientific units, the RVP8calculates the mean velocity for the normalized Nyquist interval [–1,1], i.e., the output valuesare,VȀ+q1p.For example, an output value of –0.5 corresponds to a mean velocity of *Vuń2. Thenormalized velocity VȀ is more efficient use of the limited number of bits.5.2.7  Spectrum Width AlgorithmsThe spectrum width is a measure of the combined effects of shear and turbulence. To a lesserextent, the antenna rotation rate can also effect the spectrum width. At high elevation angles, thefall speed dispersion of the scatterers also effects spectrum width.There are two choices for the spectrum width algorithm used in the RVP8, depending on thespeed and accuracy that are required for the application:R0,R1 “fast” algorithm valid when SNR >> 10 dBR0,R1,R2 “accurate” algorithm for SNR >> 0 to 5 dBThe approach used is selected in the SOPRM command. The two approaches are described below:R0,R1Width AlgorithmGiven samples of the Doppler autocorrelation function, numerous estimates of spectral vari-ance can be computed (Passarelli & Siggia, 1983). The particular estimator used by theRVP8 employs the magnitudes of  R0 and  R1 and assumes that the Doppler spectrum isGaussian (usually an acceptable assumption) and that the signal-to-noise ratio is large. Spe-cifically we have (similar to Srivastava, et al 1979):Variance +2lnƪRo|R1|ƫ+*2ln[SQI]
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–16where “ln” represents the natural logarithm. This can be compared to the expression in thepreceding section for SQI to illustrate that this expression for the variance is only valid when:SNRSNR )1[1which occurs when the SNR is large.This variance estimator is normalized to the Nyquist interval in units of [*p,p]. Thus, forexample, a variance of p2ń25 would be obtained from a Gaussian spectrum having a stan-dard deviation equal to one fifth of the total width of the plotted spectral distribution. Forscientific purposes, the spectrum width (standard deviation) is more physically meaningfulthan the variance, since it scales linearly with the severity of wind shear and turbulence. Forthese reasons, the width W is output by the RVP8:W+VarianceǸpAgain, for efficient packing in 8-bits, width is normalized to the Nyquist interval [–1, 1 ].For the example given above, the output width W would be (1/5). To obtain the width in me-ters per second, one multiplies the output width by Vu .R0,R1,R2 Width AlgorithmThe width algorithm in this case is similar except that the addition of  R2 extends the validityof the width estimates to weak signals. In this case the variance is:Variance +23lnƪ|R1||R2|ƫThe output width W is then defined as in the previous section.5.2.8  Signal Quality Index (SQI threshold) An important feature of the RVP8 is its ability to eliminate signals which are either too weak tobe useful, or which have widths too large to justify further analysis. This is done via the signalquality index (SQI) which is defined as:SQI +|R1|R0The SQI is the normalized magnitude of the autocorrelation at lag 1 and varies between 0 for anuncorrelated signal (white noise) to 1 for a noise-free zero-width signal (pure tone). Meanvelocity estimates are degraded when the spectrum, width is large or when the signal-to-noiseratio is weak. The SQI is a good measure of the uncertainty in the velocity estimates and is aconvenient screening parameter to compute. In terms of the Gaussian model, the SQI is :SQI +SNRSNR )1e*p2W22where the SNR is the signal-to-noise ratio. For very large SNR’s the SQI is a function of thespectrum width only. For a zero-width pure tone (W=0), the SQI is a function of the SNR only(e.g., for W=0, an SNR of 1 corresponds to SQI=0.5). The SQI threshold is typically set to avalue of 0.4 to 0.5.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–175.2.9  Clutter Correction (CCOR threshold) In addition to calculating the R0,R1 and optional  R2 autocorrelation terms, which are based onfiltered time series data, the RVP8 also computes  T0 which is the total unfiltered power. Bycomparing the total filtered and unfiltered powers at each range bin, a clutter power, and hence aclutter correction, for that bin can be derived. The clutter correction is defined as,CCOR +10 log SC)S+10 log 1CSR )1where S is the weather signal power,  C is the clutter power and CSR is the clutter-to-signalratio.  The algorithm for calculating CCOR depends on whether the optional  R2 autocorrelationlag is computed as described below.R0,R1 Clutter CorrectionIn this case CCOR is estimated from,CCORest +10 logƪR0T0ƫ+10 logƪS)NC)S)Nƫ+10 logƪ1)1SNRCSR )1)1SNRƫHere, the expression is strictly valid only when the signal-to-noise ratio(SNR=S/N) is large. Thus when the 2-lag approach is used, the clutter corrections are notas accurate for weak weather signals. However, the error is typically less than 3 dB.R0,R1,R2 Clutter CorrectionIn this case there is enough information to compute the clutter signal and noise power inde-pendently. The algorithm for CCOR is:CCORest +10 log SC)S+10 log 1CSR )1The clutter power is computed from:C+To*Ro+[C)S)N]*[S)N]The signal power S is then computed from:S+|R1| exp p2W22W is the width that has been previously calculated. This approach yields more accurate re-sults for the clutter correction in the case of a low SNR.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–185.2.10  Weather Signal Power (SIG threshold) A parameter called SIG is also calculated to provide an estimate of the weather signal-to-noiseratio in dB for thresholding.  The SIG calculation is different depending on the whether theoptional R2 autocorrelation is computed.R0,R1  CalculationIn this case the SIG is computed as follows:SIG +10 log ƪT0*NNƫ)CCORThis term represents the SNR after the removal of clutter.  The CCOR value is the one de-scribed for R0,R1 in the previous section.R0,R1,R2  CalculationIn this case the SIG is computed based on the SNR which is:SIG +10 log ƪ2pSR0*2pSƫwhere the signal power S is determined as described in the preceding section.5.2.11  Signal to Noise Ratio (LOG threshold)A parameter called LOG is also calculated to provide an estimate of the total signal-to-noiseratio in dB useful for reflectivity thresholding.  The formula is below:LOG +10 logƪT0*NNƫ
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–195.3  ThresholdingAn important feature of the RVP8 is its ability to accept or reject incoming data based on derivedproperties of the signals themselves.  Typically, “rejected” data are not displayed by the user’ssoftware, thus making for very clean weather presentations.5.3.1  Threshold QualifiersFor data quality control, each RVP8 output parameter can be qualified, i.e., either accepted orrejected for output, based on four threshold criteria:ID Criterion Name Pass CriterionLOG Signal-to-Noise Ratio LOG > thresholdSQI Signal Quality Index SQI > thresholdCCOR Clutter Correction CCOR > thresholdSIG Weather Signal Power SIG > thresholdThe calculation of the measured levels (e.g., SQI) for each of these qualifications has beendescribed in previous sections of this chapter. All four qualification criteria can be switched onand off independently, and the threshold levels (e.g., SQIthresh ) can each be set independently.Further, each qualifier test can be AND’d and OR’d with any other. This allows very complexthresholds criteria to be constructed as required.  The four threshold qualifiers are summarizedbelow.LOG It is essentially a measure of the total power SNR. This is usually used forthresholding of the reflectivity data. The default LOG threshold value is 0.5 dB.SQI The SQI threshold is typically used for velocity and width thresholding since it is ameasure of the coherency. It is a number between 0 and 1 (dimensionless) where 0 isperfect white noise and 1 is a pure tone (perfect Doppler signal). The default SQIthreshold value is 0.5.CCOR The clutter correction threshold is typically used to reject measurements when theclutter in a range bin is very strong (i.e., when the calculated CCOR is a largenegative number in dB). The appropriate value depends on the coherency of the radarsystem. The default threshold is set to –25 dB. Threshold values less than this (morenegative) reject fewer clutter bins. Threshold values closer to zero reject more clutterbins.SIG This is typically used only for thresholding the spectrum width to assure that thesignal power is strong enough for an accurate width measurement. The defaultthreshold value is 10 dB. If R2 processing is used, this can usually be reduced to 5 dBfor width thresholding.The following are the default threshold combinations for each of the parameters that can beselected for output from the RVP8:
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–20Parameter  Description            Threshold       dBZ Reflectivity with clutter correction LOG and CCORdBT Reflectivity without clutter correction LOGV Mean velocity SQI and CCORW Spectrum width SQI and CCOR and SIGZDR Differential reflectivity LOG5.3.2  Adjusting Threshold QualifiersThe effect of the various threshold qualifiers for each output parameter are discussed in thissection.  In optimizing thresholds for your application, it is recommended that you change onlyone parameter (level or criterion) at a time so that you can verify the effect. Some hints foroptimizing the levels for the default criteria are provided below:LOG To optimize the LOG level, display dBT or dBZ and select the lowest value of thethreshold that eliminates the display noise. If the LOG level is set too high you losesensitivity. Note that if you average more pulses or ranges, then the threshold levelcan usually be reduced.SQI To optimize the SQI level, display velocity and select the lowest value of thethreshold that eliminates the display noise. If the SQI level is set too high you losesensitivity. In general, you should see a greater area covered by velocity thanreflectivity since the velocity is more sensitive. If you do not, you should reduce yourSQI threshold.  Note that if you average more pulses or ranges, then the thresholdlevel can usually be reduced.CCOR This is used to eliminate clutter targets that are very strong. It should not be set toeliminate all clutter targets on a clear day since this means that you are losingsensitivity. To optimize the CCOR threshold it is best to know your system coherencyin terms of dB of clutter cancelation. Start at a value of 10 dB greater (closer to 0)than this. Now display a PPI of dBZ at an antenna elevation of ~1 degree.  Thedisplay should be relatively clean of any clutter targets since most will be rejected.Now reduce the CCOR (more negative) to increase the number of clutter targets onthe display until the number of clutter targets does not increase. The optimum valueof the CCOR is approximately 5 dB more (closer to zero) than this point. Forexample, if the number of clutter targets is a maximum at –35 dB, then set the CCORto ~–30 dB. Note that your clutter filter selection will effect the result.SIG This should be done last. To optimize the SIG level, display the width W and selectthe lowest value of the threshold that eliminates the display noise. If the SIG level isset too high you lose sensitivity. Note that if you average more pulses or ranges, thenthe threshold level can usually be reduced.When thresholding dBZ and dBT reflectivity data with SQI, the comparison value for acceptingthose data is the secondary SQI threshold that is defined via a slope and offset from the primaryuser value (see Mf command).  This secondary threshold is more permissive (lower valued), and
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–21is traditionally used to qualify LOG data only in the Random Phase processing mode.  But thesecondary SQI threshold is applied uniformly in all processing modes whenever reflectivity dataare specified as being thresholded by SQI.This gives you more freedom in applying an SQI threshold to your LOG data, because the cutoffvalue for reflectivity can be chosen independently from the cutoff value for the other Dopplerparameters.  The full SQI test would not normally be applied to LOG data because of theso-called “black hole” problem, i.e., loss of LOG data within regions of high shear, even thoughthe reflectivity itself was strong.  You may experiment with applying a secondary SQI thresholdto help cleanup the LOG data, but without introducing any significant black holes.5.3.3  Speckle FiltersA speckle filter is a final pass over each output ray, wherein isolated bins are removed. There aretwo speckle removers in the RVP8.S1D single-ray speckle filter. This can be used for any output parameter.S2D 3x3 speckle filter. If enabled, this is applied only to T, V, Z and W.The 1D speckle filter is the default technique. The 2D 3x3 filter is enabled by selection in themp TTY setups:2D Final Speckle/Unfold “User” or “Always”Both of these speckle filters remove isolated data points that are likely to be noise, interference,aircraft, birds or other point targets. Meteorological targets typically occupy multiple range binsso are not effected by the speckle filter. There are two primary benefits derived from using aspeckle filter:SDisplays look “cleaner” to observers.SThresholds can be set slightly more sensitive without increasing the number ofnoise pixels.The 2D 3x3 filter actually performs data filling of “missing speckles” as well as eliminatingisolated speckle bins. The two algorithms are discussed below.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–221D Speckle FilterA ray is the basic azimuth unit of the RVP8 (e.g., 1 degree) over which the samples are averagedto obtain the output base data (T, Z, V, W). For this filter, a speckle is defined as any single,valid bin (not thresholded), having thresholded bins on either side of it in range. Any suchisolated bin in a ray is set to “threshold”.  The algorithm is shown schematically below. Input Ray Indicates  Thresholded Bin1D Speckle FilteringOutput RayRangeXXX Indicates SpeckleIndicates Valid BinNote that there are two independent 1D speckle removers– one for the reflectivity data (dBT,dBZ and ZDR) and one for the Doppler data (V and W). Each one should be switched on or off,depending on the specific nature of the targets being observed. For example, when making aclutter map of the area, one would certainly want to switch both speckle filters off.2D 3x3 Speckle FilterThe 2D filter examines three adjacent range bins from three successive rays in order to assign avalue to the center point. Thus, for each output point, its eight neighboring bins in range andtime are available to the filter. Only the dBZ, dBT, Vel , and Width data are candidates for thisfiltering step; all other parameters are processed using the default 1D speckle filter.The rules for the filter are as follows:Center Point ActionAssign Threshold ElseValid Center Point If there are no or only oneother valid point in the 3x3. Do Nothing. Pass the centerpoint value as-is.Thresholded Center Point If there are 5 or fewer validneighbors in the 3x3. If there are 6 or more validneighbors in the 3x3, averageto fill the center point.Thus the 2D 3x3 filter performs 2 functions:SFilling by interpolation.SThresholding of isolated noise bins.Some examples are shown graphically in the figure below.For dBZ, dBT, and Width, the interpolated value for filling is computed as the arithmeticaverage of all available neighbors. For Vel , it is not possible to define a meaningful average in asimple way; so the  nearest  valid neighbor is simply filled in.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–23RangeAzimuth0-1101-1Zoutput00 +ThresholdThreshold if center point is valid but there are no or only one valid neighbor.Z00Z0*1RangeAzimuth0-1101-1Fill thresholded center point with average if there 6 or more valid neighbors.Z0*1Z*11 Z01Zoutput00 +[Z*11 )Z01 )Z11 )Z10 )Z*1*1)Z0*1]6RangeAzimuth00-11-12D Velocity Unfolding Step 1: Search pattern for valid second velocityPRF2PRF1V200231V11*1Z11Z10Z*1*1Indicates Thresholded Bin2D 3x3 Filtering ConceptsThe filter has some interesting properties when combined with other algorithms.Dual PRF UnfoldingDual–PRF velocity unfolding is computed within the 3x3 filter whenever both are enabled.There are two steps to the process:SStep 1: The most recent and the previous ray are used. For every valid point inthe most recent ray, the algorithm performs a search among the three nearestneighbors in the previous ray to find a valid velocity. The search pattern is shownat the bottom of the previous figure. This larger selection of alternate–PRF bins
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–24makes it more likely that the algorithm will find the pairs of Low/High PRF datathat are required for unfolding.SStep 2: The unfolded velocities are then subjected to the standard 3x3 filtering.Dual PRF, Random Phase ProcessingIn random phase processing, the “seam” at the start of the second trip is always problematicsince the transmitter main bang and nearby clutter will virtually always wipe–out the firstfew 2nd trip range bins. At a constant PRF the 2nd trip seam is always at the same range,but in dual PRF random phase mode, the seam is different each ray. Thus thresholded binsat the seam of the high PRF can be surrounded on either side by valid bins taken at the lowPRF. The 3x3 filter has the effect of interpolating the reflectivity and width data over the binsat the 2nd trip seam. Velocity data will also be filled–in using the nearest neighbor. Thus the2D filter mitigates much of the damage that is caused at the 2nd trip seam to make a nearlyseamless display.The maximum speed of the RVP8 is reduced to approximately 85000 bins/second when the 3x3filter is ON– approximately 60% of its maximum throughput when the filter is OFF. This is stilla rather large value, and should not affect most customers. For example, there would be noproblem running a scan having 2048 bins at 1–degree resolution and a 40 deg/sec scan rate.However, if you really need to operate at the absolute upper limit of the RVP8 s throughput, thenthe 3x3 filter should be disabled in the Mp menu.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–255.4  Reflectivity Calibration The calculation of reflectivity described in section 5.2.5 required the calibration reflectivitydBZo. This section describes it’s derivation. Note that customers with the SIGMET IRIS systemcan use the zauto utility to perform the calibration.  (See the IRIS Utilities Manual.)Figure 5–3: Model Intensity CurveRVP7 Measured Power(log scale, dBm)10 log IoPower at Antenna FeedN(log scale, dBm)Plot Method for Calibration of IoThis approach generates the curve shown above to determine the value of Io. The generalprocedure is to connect a calibrated signal generator to the radar receiver and inject known dBmpower levels to generate a calibration plot of measured power vs the inserted power at theantenna feed, similar to that in Figure 5–3.  The calibration reflectivity dBZo is computed fromthe radar constant and the value of Io which is  the intercept of the straight line fit with the Noiselevel. Io is the signal level for 0 dB SNR, i.e., signal power equals noise power.Typically a CW test signal is used for this. Follow the instructions provided by the radarmanufacturer for injecting a test signal. During calibration, the radar should be fully operational,so that all sources of noise are present. Ideally the transmitter should be turned on duringcalibration.Important:  Verify with the radar manufacturer that no damage will occur to the signalgenerator if the transmitter is running during the calibration.To perform the calibration, insert signals at steps of 5 or 10 dB over the entire range of thesystem.  Draw the plot shown in figure 5–3.  You can utilize fine resolution steps at the ends ofthe scale to observer the details of the roll off.  Be sure to raise the antenna up a few degrees to
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–26avoid ground thermal noise.  Also tune the frequency of the signal generator using the setupcommand “pr”, and displaying the received signal spectrum.  Be sure to check the tuning at theend of the calibration to make sure the signal generator and IFD have not drifted apart.Each time that a new signal level is injected, the measured power values are obtained by firstinvoking the SNOISE command and then reading-back the results using the GPARM command.The Log of Measured Noise Level (Word 6) from GPARM should be used. This procedureaverages many samples together. For IRIS users, this is all handled by the zauto utility.Finally turn it all the way down and make one more sample to measure the noise level N. Io isobtained from the intercept of the horizontal line at N and the straight line fit to the linearportion of the curve. This value must be corrected for losses as discussed in the section below.Single-Point Direct Method for Calibration of IoThis calibration method requires no support software. The approach uses the TTY setupscommands. Again the signal generator output must be calibrated in absolute dBm. Use a powermeter to check the calibration.STurn the radiate off and connect the signal generator to the test signal injectionpoint.SRaise the antenna to at least 20 degrees, and set the azimuth to point away fromany known RF sources including the sun.SSelect the pulse width using the mt command.SSelect the pr command and use the commands to set the following:Plotting Received Power Spectrum... Rx:Pri,  Zoom:x1–x8,  Navg:25,  Start:100.01 usec (14.99 km),  Span:50 usecSSet the signal generator to the approximate radar RF frequency with a power levelcorresponding to a strong signal (30 dB above the noise). Use a DC test signal(not pulsed). This signal should be visible as a peak in the spectrum display.Adjust the siggen RF signal frequency so that produces the precise IF frequency(e.g., IF frequency of 30 MHz).STurn the signal generator off and record the “Filtered” power level. Note thatbecause of the large averaging it will require several seconds for the average tostabilize.STurn the signal generator on, verify that the peak is still at the IF frequency andadjust the power level to obtain precisely 3 dB more “Filtered” power than wasobserved with the noise only. Again, allow several seconds for the averaging tostabilize after you make each amplitude adjustment.This is the value of Io, i.e., the test signal signal power equals the noise power. The next step isto correct the value of Io for losses as discussed in the section below.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–27Treatment of Losses in the CalibrationIn the calibration of the dBm level of the test signal, be sure to account for any losses that mayoccur between the antenna feed and the injection point, and in the cable and coupler that is usedto connect the signal generator to the injection point. Figure 5–4 illustrates the nomenclature ofthe various losses that are involved in the calibration. The relationship between the injected testsignal and the value of the received power relative to the feed is:dBmFeed +dBmInjected )dBLFeed:CouplerdBmFeed +dBmSiggen *dBLCoupler *dBLCable )dBLFeed:CouplerFor example, assume the following:Loss between the feed and the coupler dBLFeed:Coupler 3 dBLoss caused by the coupler dBLCoupler 30 dBLoss in the cable from siggen to coupler dBLCable 2 dBThen if the test signal generator output is –50 dBm, the injected power isdBmInjected = –50–[30+2]= –82 dBm.The equivalent power at the feed is then 3 dB more than thisdBmFeed  = –82+3 = –79 dBm.During the calibration, there are several ways to handle the losses using these equations. Twoexamples are:SEach signal generator value can be corrected for losses so that the calibration plot shows IFDmeasured power vs received power at the feed. This is recommended for manual calibration.SThe signal generator values can be plotted directly and the intercept power Io can becorrected for losses so that it is properly referenced to power at the feed. This is the approachused by the IRIS zauto utility.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–28Figure 5–4: Illustration of Losses that Affect LOG CalibrationTransmitterPtCoupler ReceiverSig GendBmsiggenRVP7IFDLtLFeed:CouplerFeedReceive PathTransmitPathdBmFeedLCableLCouplerPt FeedDetermination of dBZoThe calibration reflectivity is determined from the radar equation as follows:dBZo+10 log ƪCr2oIoƫwhere Io is in mW (corrected for receive losses), the reference range  ro is 1 km, and the radarconstant C is:C+2.69  1016l2PttqfG2Ltwhere,lRadar wavelength in cm.PtTransmitted peak power in kW.LtTransmit loss (e.g., 3 dB corresponds to Lt+2)tPulse width in microseconds.qHorizontal half-power full beamwidth.fVertical half-power full beamwidth.GAntenna gain (dimensionless) on beam axis.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–29The radar constant is determined from the characteristics of your radar (check with themanufacturer if you are unsure of the values). Note that transmit losses are accounted for in theradar constant, while receiver loss is usually included in the calculation of Io.Finally, if the value of  Io calculated above was not based on loss-corrected dBm values, correctIo as follows:dBIo corrected +dBIo*dBLCoupler *dBLCable )dBLFeed:CouplerExample Calculation of dBZo:This sample calculation is provided so that programmers can check their arithmetic. The radarparameters:lRadar wavelength in cm. 5 cm.PtTransmitted power in kW. 500 kWLtTransmit Loss 2 (3 dB)tPulse width in microseconds 1 microsecondqHorizontal half-power beamwidth in degrees 1 degreefVertical half-power beamwidth in degrees 1 degreeGAntenna gain (dimensionless) on beam axis  19,953 (43.0 dB)The radar constant for this example is,C+2.69  1016l2PttqfG2Lt+(2.69  1016)(5)2(500)(1)(1)(19, 953)2(2.0)+6.76  106ƪmm6m*3km*2mW*1ƫAssume that Io with loss correction is calculated to be –105 dBm (3.16  10*11  mW), thendBZo is,dBZo+10 logƪCr2oIoƫ+10 logƪ(6.76  106)(1)2(3.16  10*11)ƫ+*36.7dB (mm6m*3)This value would be down-loaded to the signal processor using the SOPRM command.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–305.5  Dual PRT Processing ModeThe RVP8 supports two major modes for Dual PRT processing, i.e., algorithms using triggersthat consist of alternate short and long periods.  Most of the Doppler parameters are available ineach of these modes.  You may also request time series data in both cases; the samples will beorganized so that the first pulse of a short PRT pair always comes first.5.5.1  DPRT-1 ModeThe DPRT-1 trigger consists of a very short PRT from which Doppler data are obtained,followed by a much longer PRT whose purpose is to limit the average duty cycle of thetransmitter.  No information is extracted from the long PRT pair, but Dual-PRF techniques canstill be used by varying the short period from ray to ray.  The “-1” suffix in the name for thismode is a reminder that Doppler parameters are computed from the short PRT only.  TheDPRT-1 mode is intended for millimeter wavelength radars that must run at a very high effectivePRF (up to 20KHz) to get an acceptable unambiguous velocity, but which also have a muchlower duty cycle constraint on the average number of pulses transmitted each second.In DPRT-1 mode the requested PRF from the host computer will generally be quite large (up to20KHz); and the reciprocal of this “effective instantaneous PRF” will determine the trigger’sshort PRT interval.  In this way, all subsequent physical calculations will be scaled correctly,e.g., unambiguous velocity, maximum first trip range, etc., are all supposed to be based on theshort PRT interval.  The host computer must therefore be configured so that it can ask for thesevery high trigger rates.The duration of the long PRT interval is not specified directly by the host computer.  Rather, theRVP8’s “Maximum number of Pulses/Second” setup parameter is used to compute how muchdelay to insert in order to insure that the transmitter’s duty cycle is not exceeded.  This specialtreatment applies only in DPRT mode; all other modes that have uniform triggers continue tointerpret the RVP8’s trigger bound as a simple “Maximum PRF”.Since DPRT-1 mode uses only the short pairs of pulses, it is not possible to run the “R2” momentestimation algorithms.  The RVP8 will return the GPARM “Invalid Processor Configuration” bitif “R2” is requested in DPRT mode.  The error bit will also be returned if the number of pulsesrequested (sample size) is not even.  All other error conditions are the same as FFT mode.Warning: Since the RVP8’s “Maximum number of Pulses/Sec” is used to enforcethe duty cycle limit, it is essential that it not be overwritten by the hostcomputer’s upper PRF limit, which typically will be much higher.  To insurethis, you must make sure that the PWINFO command is disabled in the RVP8“Mc” setup menu.  You will have no duty cycle protection if you do not do this.Note: You may still choose to run Dual-PRF velocity unfolding within theDPRT-1 mode.  What will happen is that the short PRT will vary in the selected3:2, 4:3, or 5:4 ratio, but the overall duty cycle will remain constant.  Thecombination of Dual–PRF and DPRT-1 is tremendously effective in extendingthe radar’s unambiguous velocity interval.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–315.5.2  DPRT-2 ModeThe trigger consists of alternating short and long period pulses, where the ratio of the periods isdetermined by the velocity unfolding ratio that has been selected.  Doppler data are extractedfrom both the short and long pulse pairs (hence the “-2” suffix), and unfolded velocities aremade available on each ray based on the combined PRT data from that ray alone.  DPRT-2 modeis intended for rapidly scanning radars where the ray-to-ray spatial continuity assumptions of thetraditional Dual-PRF algorithms do not apply.The DPRT-2 velocity unfolding algorithm uses a modified version of the standard Dual-PRFalgorithm.  Both start by computing a simple velocity difference as a first approximation of theunfolded result.  The standard algorithm uses that difference to unfold the velocity from the mostrecent ray, which yields a lower variance estimate than the difference itself.  The DPRT-2algorithm is similar, except that the folded velocity from both PRTs are unfolded independentlyand then averaged together.In addition to the above, the RVP8 also computes the DC average of the (I,Q) data within eachbin.  This is used as a simple estimate of clutter power, so that corrected reflectivities areavailable in DPRT-2 mode whenever a non-zero clutter filter is selected.  DPRT-1 mode is thesame in this respect.  However, the DPRT-2 widths use an improved algorithm based on the twodifferent PRTs, and which avoids the SNR sensitivity of the DPRT-1 width estimator.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–325.6  Dual PRF Velocity UnfoldingFor a radar of wavelength  l operating at a fixed sampling period  ts+1ńPRF , the unambiguousvelocity and range intervals are given by:Vu+l4ts     and     Ru+cts2where “c” is the speed of light. Often these intervals do not fully cover the span of velocity andrange that one would like to measure. The problem is generally worse for short wavelengthradars, since that unambiguous velocity span is directly proportional to l for a given ts. If theunambiguous range interval is made sufficiently large by increasing ts , then the resultingvelocity span may be unacceptably small.The RVP8 provides a built-in mechanism for extending the unambiguous velocity span by afactor of two, three, or four beyond that given above. The technique, called Dual PRF velocityunfolding, uses two pulse periods rather than one, and relies on the extra information thusobtained to correct (i.e. unfold) the mean velocity measurement from each individual period.The Dual PRF trigger pattern consists of alternating (N+k)-pulse intervals where the period ineach interval is either tl  (for the low-PRF) or th (for the high-PRF). Here “N” is the samplesize, and “k” represents a delay that permits the clutter filter to equilibrate to the new PRF aftereach change.  The clutter filter impulse response lengths vary according to which filter isselected.The two trigger periods tl and th must be chosen in either a 3:2, 4:3, or 5:4 ratio. These ratiosgive factors of two, three, and four times velocity expansion over the th period alone.  Theunfolding algorithm makes use of the following results.  Suppose that the radar observes a targetwith mean velocity V at each of the two trigger periods. The measured phase angles  for the  R1autocorrelations at the two PRFs are:ql+4pVtll      and      qh+4pVthlwhere angles outside the basic [*p,p] interval are returned to that interval by appropriateadditions of "2p. These angles correspond to the ordinary single-PRF Doppler velocitymeasurements, and the "2p  uncertainties reflects the fact that each measurement is foldedinto its own unambiguous interval:Vul +l4tl      and      Vuh +l4thIf we define f to be the difference between the two measured phases then:f+ql*qh+4plƪtl*thƫwhich can be interpreted as a phase angle within the unfolded interval:Vu unfold +l4(tl*th)
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–33Now if tl  and th are in a 3:2 ratio, then:tl*th+tl3+th2and thus Vu unfold +3Vul +2VuhThe angle f represents a velocity phase angle in [*p,p] , but with respect to an enlargedunambiguous interval. Thus, by simply differencing the folded angles from the high and lowPRFs, we obtain an angle that is unfolded to a larger velocity span.  Similar reasoning shows thatthe 4:3 ratio gives a factor of three improvement over Vuh  .In practice, the unfolded angle f is not in itself a suitable velocity estimator. The reason is thatthe variance of f is equal to the sum of the variances of each of its components, i.e., twice thatof the individual measurements alone. If the target is at all noisy, then this increase in variancecan be severe. Rather than use f directly, the RVP8 uses it only as a rough estimate indetermining how to unfold the individual velocity measured from each PRF.Figure 5–5: Dual PRF Conceptsql*qhResultqlń3Region IIIRegion IIRegion ILow PRF Case High PRF CaseRegion IRegion IIql*qhResultqhń2This technique is illustrated in Figure 5–5. The figure shows how the low-PRF and high-PRFangles are unfolded based on the difference angle.  The diagrams show phase planes representingthe large unfolded velocity interval, and the locations of various vectors on those planes.Referring first to the right figure, the difference angle is plotted, and the plane is divided intotwo equal size regions, one of which is centered on the difference vector. The high-PRF angle isthen divided by two and plotted. The resultant unfolded velocity angle must either be this vector,or this vector plus p. Since adding p places the vector into acceptance Region 1 where it is
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–34nearest the difference angle, we conclude that this is the correct unfolding. Likewise, on the leftdiagram we unfold the low-PRF angle by dividing the plane into thirds centered on thedifference angle. The result angle is eitherql3,ql3)2p3or ql3)4p3depending on which one falls into the acceptance Region 1. Note that the resultant angle is thesame in each case.The RVP8 makes efficient use of the incoming data by unfolding velocities from both the lowand the high-PRF data, making use each time of information in the previous ray. When low-PRFdata are taken the derived velocities are unfolded by combining information from the previoushigh-PRF interval. Likewise, when high-PRF data are acquired the velocities are unfolded basedon the previous low-PRF interval. Thus, when operating in the Dual PRF mode, the RVP8outputs one data ray for each (N+k)-pulse interval. However, the velocity data in the Dual PRFrays are unfolded, so that the [–1,+1] interval now represents either two or three times the priorvelocity range. Put another way, the data are still interpreted as described in the section on meanvelocity estimation, except that Vu is now larger.The width data are also modified somewhat during Dual PRF unfolding. Although valid widthsare obtained independently on all rays, those measured at low-PRF are larger than those athigh-PRF. This is simply because the dimensionless width units are with respect to a largervelocity interval in the latter case. To compensate for this, low-PRF widths are multiplied byeither 2/3 or 3/4 before being output. This puts them in the same scale as the high-PRF values,and thus, the widths do not vary on alternate pulses. A useful consequence of this is that widthdata can be sent directly to a color display generator without having to plot every other ray in adifferent scale.There are a few words of caution that should be kept in mind when using the RVP8 in the DualPRF processing modes. The unfolding algorithms make the assumption that targets aremore-or-less continuous from ray to ray. Otherwise, it would not make sense to use data from aprevious ray to unfold velocities in the current ray. Users must therefore assure that their antennascan rate and beamwidth are such that each target is illuminated, at least partially, over each full2(N+k)-pulse interval. In practice, a certain amount of decorrelation from ray to ray isacceptable, since the previous rays are used only to decide into which unfolded interval thecurrent ray should be placed.  Small errors in the previous ray data, therefore, cause no error inthe output. However, large previous-ray errors would lead to incorrect unfolding.A more subtle side effect of Dual PRF processing arises from clutter filtering because clutternotches now appear at several locations in the unfolded velocity span, rather than just at zerovelocity. These additional rejection points come about because the original velocity intervals aremapped some integer number of times to create the unfolded interval. Since each originalinterval has a clutter notch at DC, it follows that the final expanded velocity interval will haveseveral such notches. For example, in the 3:2 case, in addition to removing DC the clutter filterremoves velocities at *2Vuń3,)2Vuń3, and Vu.Unfortunately, these clutter filter “images” are a fundamental consequence of the Dual PRFprocessing technique and are not easily removed. They can cause trouble not only for thevelocity unfolding itself, but because the computed clutter corrections to be wrong at the image
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–35points. However, there is a useful work-around in the RVP8 to minimize their impact — turningthe clutter filter off at far ranges where little clutter is expected and using a narrow clutter filterminimizes the effects of the clutter filter on weather targets.The 4:3 PRF unfolding ratio is more susceptible to unfolding errors in cases where the spectrumwidth is large and/or the SNR is low. The user should experiment with the two ratios todetermine which provides the best results for their particular application.  Although the RVP8trigger generator can produce any trigger frequency, only the 3:2 and 4:3 ratios can be used withthe built-in unfolding algorithms. The RVP8 still permits other PRT ratios to be explored, but theunfolding technique must then be manually programmed on the user’s host computer.Oscilloscope observations of Dual PRF triggers can sometimes be confusing.  Figure 5–6 showsseven possible scope traces (and their associated probabilities) for the RVP8 trigger during DualPRF operation.   The PRF ratio is 4:3, and the sample size is 50 pulses at the high PRF, and 37pulses at the low PRF.  The signal labelled “SCOPE” is the composite of these traces, and is whatwould actually be seen on an oscilloscope.  Notice that there are a number of low probability pulses.The exact details of the sample sizes and the trigger hold off time can make the low probabilitypulses appear to come and go randomly.  This is normal, and is no cause for alarm.Figure 5–6: Example of Dual PRF Trigger Waveforms47.0%47.3%1.0%1.0%1.0%1.3%1.3%SCOPE100% 50% 50% 49% 2.3% 48.6% 48% 2.3% 2.3% 94.3% 2.3% 2.3%
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–365.7  Optional Dual Polarization- ZDR, PHIDP, KDP,LDR, ...5.7.1  Overview of Dual PolarizationPolarization measurements can provide additional information that can be used to determinemore accurate measurements of rainfall or, in some cases, infer particle type such as hail orgraupel. The fundamental basis for polarization is that raindrops, particularly larger ones, are notspherical — they are oblate (flattened) such that the horizontal axis is longer than the verticalaxis. This means that raindrops will respond differently, for example, to vertical and horizontalpolarization of the electric field vector. Because of this, and for technical reasons,  mostpolarization radars use horizontal and vertical polarization. For a review of polarizationtechniques and variables, please refer to Doviak and Zrnic (1993) section 8.5.Fundamentally a polarization radar measures amplitude and phase in the same manner as aconventional radar. The new information is that the amplitude and phase can be measured atmore than one polarization. The differences in amplitudes and phases measured at differentpolarizations contain information on the presence or absence of non-spherical scatterers such aslarge flattened drops. For convenience, some of the basic polarization variables are describedbelow:ZDR: Differential ReflectivityIn the case of amplitude (power) measurements, the larger horizontal axis of drops causesthe power measured at horizontal polarization (of the electric field) to be larger than the pow-er measured at vertical polarization. The ratio of the reflectivity factors ZH/ZV expressed indB is given the name ZDR or differential reflectivity. It is generally positive in rain (i.e., >1)and is usually less than about 5 dB. When the rainfall rate is large, there are typically morelarge drops so that ZDR is larger. Low ZDR and high dBZ indicates the presence of hailwhich is perhaps tumbling with no preferred orientation. ZDR, because it is a ratio of powers,is not sensitive to the radar calibration as long as the overall gain of the H and V channelsis the same (or calibrated).PhiDP and KDP: Differential Phase and Specific Differential PhaseIn the case of phase measurement, the speed of propagation is also affected by the asymmetryof the larger drops. Because of the longer dimension of the horizontal axis of drops, the me-dium is effectively more dense for horizontal than for vertical polarization so that the speedof light is reduced for horizontal polarization. This causes the horizontal wavelength to beslightly compressed (more phase cycles per unit distance) in comparison with the verticalwavelength which leads to a phase difference between horizontal and vertical.  The phasedifference ΦH−ΦV is called ΦDP differential phase shift. ΦDP increases with range since thephase shifts faster (more frequency cycles per unit distance) for the compressed horizontalmicrowaves as compared to the faster vertical microwaves. The range derivative of the dif-ferential phase, i.e., the change of phase per unit distance, is called KDP or the specific differ-ential phase. KDP is almost directly proportional to the rainfall rate so that it has the potentialfor improving precipitation rate measurements as compared to traditional Z–R relationshipmeasurements which can be highly inaccurate.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–37LDR: Linear Depolarization RatioSome advanced polarization radars can transmit at one polarization and receive simulta-neously in two channels, usually the co–polarized and cross–polarized components. For ex-ample, when transmitting horizontal, both horizontal (co–polarized) and vertical (cross–po-larized) are received by two separate channels. In the case of vertical or horizontal, the ratioof the power Zcross / Zco is called the linear depolarization ratio or LDR. The amount of inci-dent radiation that is depolarized by a particle depends on the particle shape and orientation(e.g., canting angle with respect to horizontal). Perfectly spherical particles do not depolarizeeither horizontal or vertical polarization so that LDR is zero. Particles that are wet, tumblingand irregularly shaped will give larger LDR values. Therefore, LDR values in rain tend tobe small, e.g., less than –25dB. Larger values of LDR can occur in the bright band or in thepresence of hail.A radar and antenna system must be optimized to measure LDR by assuring that the antenna,feed and supporting struts and radome are not themselves depolarizing the transmitted andreceived radiation. This is called “cross–pol isolation”.  The integrated cross–pol isolationof the antenna pattern must be better than about 30 dB for LDR measurement since –20 dBis a large LDR.[RHOHV, PHIDP] [RHOH, PHIH] [RHOV, PHIV]: Correlation VariablesThere are several correlation functions that can be calculated depending on the capabilitiesof the radar. These are generally complex having both an amplitude and phase. These are allnormalized so that a perfect correlation magnitude is 1 and perfectly decorrelated is 0.RHOHV and PHIDP are the magnitude and phase of the correlation between the horizontaland vertical co-polarized channels. These are available on H/V switching systems or on sys-tems that transmit simultaneous H and V.  As discussed in a preceding paragraph, PHIDPcan be used to infer precipitation rate. RHOHV in rain is typically very close to 1 (0.98).RHOHV values can be reduced in the case of irregularly shaped, randomly oriented, wettumbling particles. Thus RHOHV has information on the particle type.RHOH and PHIH are the magnitude and phase of the correlation between the co-polarizedand cross-polar channels for H transmission and simultaneous H and V reception. RHOVand PHIV denote the cross–channel correlation magnitude and phase for vertical transmis-sion. These are available on dual-channel receiver with transmit either fixed or alternating.The information content of the cross-pol correlations  is the topic of current research.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–385.7.2  Radar System ConsiderationsA polarization radar is characterized by how it transmits and how it receives. For simplicity wewill assume that the radar uses horizontal and/or vertical polarization. However, otherpolarization pairs could be used (e.g., right and left circular polarization).Transmit ModesSFixed (horizontal or vertical)- this can be controlled by a switch or the radar canbe simply fixed to transmit a single polarization. If a switch is used, it can be asimple slow waveguide switch rather than a fast switch (pulse-to-pulse).SAlternating (horizontal and vertical)- in this case the radar alternatespulse-to-pulse between horizontal and vertical. A high-power fast switch is usedto switch the polarization between the two channels.SSimultaneous (horizontal and vertical)- horizontal and vertical are transmittedsimultaneously.Receive ModesSSingle-channel receiver- used only for alternating transmission. The receivertypically receives the co–polarized radiation (transmit H and receive H thentransmit V and receive V).SDual-channel receiver- receives two channels (H and V) simultaneously.The table below summarizes the various transmit and receive cases and the polarization variablesthat are available for each. Note that standard parameters are available for all cases (dBT, dBZ,V and W). The RVP8 supports all of these cases.Transmitter TypeReceiver Type Fixed H Fixed V AlternatingH&V SimultaneousH+VSingle-Channel ConventionalRadar ConventionalRadar ZDRRHOHVPHIDP and KDPNot applicableDual-Channel LDRHRHOHPHIHLDRVRHOVPHIVLDRH   LDRVRHOH   RHOVPHIH   PHIVZDRRHOHVPHIDP and KDPZDRRHOHVPHIDP and KDP(STAR mode)The fixed single -channel cases are conventional radars rather than polarization radars. The caseof simultaneous H+V transmission and a single radar does not make physical sense. The othercases provide various polarization measurements.  The fixed dual-channel cases allow thecross-polarization LDR and the co-pol/cross-pol correlation amplitude and phase to be measured
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–39(e.g., RHOH and PHIH). The simultaneous H+V transmission and dual-channel reception issometimes called the STAR mode (simultaneous transmit and receive). This allows the co–polmeasurements to be made (ZDR, RHOHV, PHIDP and KDP). The alternating transmissiondual-channel receiver allows both the co–pol and the cross-pol measurements to be made, i.e., itis the most complete.Summary of Radar System CharacteristicsThe RVP8 supports all of these modes, but most polarization radar systems do not. As mentionedbefore, the measurement of cross-pol parameters such as LDR (fixed or alternating transmissionand dual-channel reception) requires a radar system that has been optimized for cross–polisolation, e.g., an offset feed antenna and no radome. By removing the feed, support struts andradome from the path of the radiation, the cross–pol isolation can be improved.The single-channel alternating method has been used in several polarization radars for ZDRmeasurement. The advantage of this approach is that it is relatively easy to modify aconventional radar by simply adding a dual port feed and a high-power fast switch above theantenna rotary joints. The disadvantage is that the switch is costly and will eventually fail.For these reasons, the STAR mode has come into recent use. No switch is required and thecomponents are fairly reliable. The disadvantage of the approach (as it is usually implemented)is that a dual rotary joint and dual waveguides are required to duct both the H and the V throughthe antenna pedestal up to the antenna feed. In spite of this, the STAR mode offers perhaps thebest approach for upgrading an existing radar or for factory installation on a new radar ofconventional design.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–405.7.3  RVP8 Dual-Channel Receiver ApproachDual-Channel Multiplexing for the IFDThe RVP8 uses an innovative technique for implementing the dual-channel receiver approach,i.e., dual-channel multiplexing. Just as a single wire can carry multiple telephone conversations,two polarization channels can be put on the same wire at different IF frequencies, digitized bythe IF Digitizer and then separated by digital filtering. This means that the exact same hardwarethat is used for a single-channel digital receiver is used for the dual-channel application. Thetypical IF separation is 6 MHz and the channel isolation is about 50 dB which is more thanadequate for even sensitive LDR measurements.The figure below shows  a block diagram of the approach for the magnetron case.Figure 5–7: Dual Receiver Magnetron CaseIFDHorizontal IF @ 30 MHzVertical IF @ 24 MHzHorz Burst @ 30 MHzVert Burst @ 24 MHzΣΣReference clock of synthesized STALO (e.g. 10 MHz)RF +30 MHzHorizontal RFVertical RFTransmit Burst RFRF +24 MHzRF +30 MHzRF +24 MHzRF +30 MHzRF +24 MHzDAFC24 Digital AFC Control for Magnetron SystemsDualSTALOUplinkIF InBurst/COHODownBPF30242430BPFCLKMagnetron ApproachThe approach for the magnetron case requires a dual output STALO to obtain the two IF’s forhorizontal and vertical (H and V). The H and V RF channels are mixed to obtain the H and V IFsignals at 30 and 24 MHz in the example. In addition, the transmit sample (also know as the“burst pulse” is split and mixed with the two IF’s so that there is a version at 30 and 24 MHz.This is important for the determination of the transmit phase corresponding to each IF.  Both theH and V IF signals are combined and then digitized in the usual way by a standard RVP8 IFD.The same is done with the 24 and 30 MHz versions of the transmit burst sample. The
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–41anti–aliasing filters usually installed on the IFD are removed and replaced by separate filters thatare placed ahead of the point where the signals are combined. Note that these filters are centeredat the appropriate IF frequency and are typically 6 MHz wide for a 6 MHz IF separation. Thetwo composite signals are then digitized by the IFD identically to the case of a single-channelreceiver and later separated during the digital band pass filtering/mixing step to obtain the I andQ of the burst sample and range bin values of I and Q values.Klystron ApproachIn the case of a Klystron system, the approach is the same, except that the COHO must generatetwo frequencies which are mixed with the STALO to provide the two reference frequencies.These are used in place of the STALO1 and STALO2 frequencies in the diagram. The same twoCOHO signals (e.g., at 24 and 30 MHz) are then treated identically to the transmit burst pulse inthe magnetron case. In this case there is no burst pulse so the two burst pulse mixers are notrequired.Reference Clock to IFDIn either case, it is critical that the oscillators (both STALO’s in the case of a magnetron and theSTALO and both COHO’s in the case of a Klystron) be phase locked to a common referenceclock. This clock, or a derivative frequency of the clock such as a COHO frequency, is input intothe IFD to provide an absolute phase reference. Another alternative is two supply the differencefrequency between the two IF’s as the reference clock. To do this, the outputs of the twoSTALO’s can be mixed by an additional mixer and filtered to obtain (for example) a 6 MHzreference frequency.The RVP8 IFD phase locks its sampling crystal to the reference clock input. Trigger generationby the RVP8 will also be phase locked to the reference clock. The reference clock must be in therange 2 to 60 MHz at 0 to –10 dBm and stable in phase to 10–7. The RVP8 IFD must bespecially configured with a locking crystal to enable this feature. SIGMET will either factoryinstall the modification or assist the customer in performing the modification and supply thenecessary components.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–425.7.4  Overview of Processing AlgorithmsPolarization Modes and Outputs Supported by RVP8The RVP8 supports four polarization modes summarized in the table below. For each case, thestandard moments (T, Z, V and W) are calculated as well. The notation for the outputs used hereis similar to that in standard usage (e.g., Doviak and Zrnic). However, for LDR we use thenotation LDRH to indicate that this is the LDR for horizontal transmission. The notation RHOHand PHIH is used to indicate the magnitude and phase of the covariance between the co- andcross–polarized channels for H transmit.Case Transmit Receive ProcessingMode Polarization Outputs1Fixed Horizontal orFixed Vertical Dual-Channel PPP only LDRH RHOH PHIH orLDRV RHOV PHIV2Simultaneous H+V(STAR Mode)Dual-Channel PPP orZDR for FFT, Ran-dom Phase andDPRT1&2ZDR PHIDP KDPRHOHV3Alternating H/V Single-Channel PPP only ZDR PHIDP KDPRHOHV4Alternating H/V Dual-Channel PPP only LDRH RHOH PHIHLDRV RHOV PHIVZDR PHIDP KDPRHOHVInput Receiver Sample NotationFor the discussion of polarization, we will adopt the notation used by Doviak and Zrnic. Thereceived signal for pulse n from a single range bin shall be denoted as:snhh Receive h: Transmit h Horizontal co-polar signalsnvh Receive v: Transmit h Horizontal cross–polar signalsnvv Receive v: Transmit v Vertical co–polar signalsnhv Receive h: Transmit v Vertical cross–polar signalThe pulse index is now indicated by the superscript as opposed to the subscript. The firstsubscript indicates the received polarization while the second subscript indicates the transmitpolarization. If the transmit is the same as the received polarization, then this is called theco–polarized signal. If the transmit and receive are different then this is called thecross–polarized signal.These variables are complex and are the same is the “sn” notation used earlier, for example wecan write:snhhĄ+ĄInhhĄ)ĄjĄQnhhto show the relationship to the received I and Q values. Either filtered and unfiltered versions ofthe samples can be selected for processing. However, for convenience we will drop the s’notation for filtered samples.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–43Notation and Model for CorrelationsThe pulse pair processing mode is used for all of the polarization calculations, except thatZDR-only processing for the STAR case can be done in either FFT or random phase as well aspulse pair. As with the standard moments, the autocorrelations form the basis for the processingof the polarization variables.The autocorrelations are computed in a manner identical to the standard moments, e.g., in pulsepair mode, the autocorrelations for the horizontal transmit co-polar channel are:Tohh +1MȍMn+1snhh *snhhRohh +1MȍMn+1sȀnhh *sȀnhhR1hh +1M*1ȍM*1n+1sȀnhh *sȀn)1hhR2hh +1M*2ȍM*2n+1sȀnhh *sȀn)2hhWhat is different is that for polarization systems, this processing can be applied in up to fourseparate channels (shh, svh, svv and shv). The physical model for the channel powers is identical tothe model used for the standard moment cases, i.e.,Co-Channel Power Cross-Channel PowerRhho+grhgthShh )NhRvho+grvgthSvh )NvRvvo+grvgtvSvv )NvRhvo+grhgtvShv )NhHere S is used to denote the actual backscatter average power to the radar which, whenmultiplied by the appropriate transmitter and receiver gains, yields the actual measured power.Sometimes in comparing powers in two channels (e.g., ZDR and LDR) we will need to know therelative gains of the two channels. However, in many calculations, the relative gains cancel-outand in these cases the algorithms are implemented assuming all the gains are equal to 1.In the algorithm descriptions, we will often use the notation common in the literature that (forexample):Rohh +1MȍMn+1sȀnhh *sȀnhh +t|sȀhh|2u
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–44Noise Bias of Channel Power and Optional CorrectionThe average noise powers Nv and Nh are assumed to be receiver noise only. These bias theautocorrelations at lag zero, i.e., the channel power measurements. Autocorrelations at lags 1 and2 are not biased by noise. Cross channel correlations are also not biased by noise, assuming thatthe noise in the two channels is independent (a good assumption).The channel noise values are measured directly by the RVP8 during noise sampling. Whether touse these measured values to correct for the noise power when computing a channel power isoptionally configured in the TTY setups. The choice is made in the mp TTY setup question“Polarization Parameters NoiseCorrected:YES/NO”.  If enabled, every time that a channelpower is calculated, the noise power is subtracted.This has some interesting effects. With no noise correction, ZDR values in weak signal regionswill be biased by noise toward 0 dB (equal power), while if noise correction is enabled thevalues will be unbiased but will show substantial deviation over the region. The choice is up tothe user.Clutter FilteringClutter filtering is available for all four cases. The use of clutter filters should be carefullyconsidered since many polarization parameters such as ZDR and LDR require highly accuratebin–to–bin consistency.  The clutter filters will attenuate some small amount of weather nearzero velocity and the amount could be slightly different at the two polarizations. When using theclutter filters, users should verify that the functioning is acceptable for their application.The standard moments (T, Z, V, W) are filtered in the usual manner by selecting a clutter filter(other than Filter #0 which is the All Pass filter). To enable clutter filtering of the polarizationvariables, the mp TTY setup question “Polarization Parameters Filtered” should be set to YES.The polarization algorithms will then be calculated with filtered time series. Note that filteringcan be effectively disabled for the polarization variables by selecting Filter #0 even if the mpsetup is set to enable filtering. This allows users to make easy comparison of the filtered vsunfiltered results using their application software without having to change the RVP8 setup.The s’ notation for filtered samples shall be dropped in the algorithm discussions. It isunderstood that the input samples in all cases may be either filtered or unfiltered according to theuser’s choice in the TTY setups.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–455.7.5  Case 1: Fixed Transmit: Dual-Channel ReceiverInput Receiver SamplesIn fixed mode the radar is configured  (either permanently or by means of a switch) to transmiteither vertical or horizontal polarization with dual-channel reception of both the co- andcross–channel polarizations, e.g., transmit horizontal and receive both horizontal (co) andvertical (cross) polarizations.The received samples in the two transmit cases are:Transmit Horizontal or Transmit Verticalƪs1hh :s1vhƫĄƪs2hh :s2vhƫĄƪs3hh :s3vhƫĄ.Ą.Ą.ĄƪsMhh :sMvhƫƪs1vv :s1hvƫĄƪs2vv :s2hvƫĄƪs3vv :s3hvƫĄ.Ą.Ą.ĄƪsMvv :sMhvƫCalculation of the Polarization MeasurandsThe processing in this mode is done by pulse pair algorithm. The user may select a clutter filter,but in general this is not recommended for polarization studies since the clutter filter mightinterfere with the accuracy of sensitive parameters such as LDR.The polarization measurands for the two transmit cases are as follows:Transmit Horizontal or Transmit VerticalLDRH +10ĄLOGĄƪSvhShhƫ  or    LDRV +10ĄLOGĄƪShvSvvƫ+10ĄLOGĄƪt|svh|2u*Nvt|shh|2u*NhƫĄ*XDR or +10ĄLOGĄƪt|shv|2u*Nht|svv|2u*NvƫĄ)XDRRHOH +|òh|or RHOV +|òv|PHIH +arg[òh]or PHIV +arg[òv]Here, the H and V average channel powers are computed as follows with optional noisecorrection, i.e.,Co- grhgthĄShh +t |shh|2u*Nhor grvgtvĄSvv +t |svv|2u*NvCross- grvgthĄSvh +t |svh|2u*Nvor grhgtvĄShv +t |shv|2u*NhThe complex covariance ρ (used above) is:for H transmit òh+tsvhĄs*hh uSvhShhǸor for V transmit òv+tshvĄs*vv uShvSvvǸFortunately, the algorithms do not require us to know all of the individual gain terms. Theycancel in the calculation of ρ so are taken as =1 in the implementation. However, the differentialreceiver gain XDR  must be known from calibration to calculate LDR:dBĄValueĄisĄĄXDR +10ĄLOGĄxdrĄĄĄwhereĄtheĄlinearĄvalueĄisĄĄĄxdrĄ+Ągrvgrh
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–465.7.6  Case 2: Simultaneous Dual Transmit and Receive (STAR mode)Input Receiver SamplesIn this mode there is simultaneous transmit and receive of both vertical and horizontalpolarization.  For each pulse there is a measurement of the complex amplitude in each channel,i.e.,ƪs1hh :s1vvƫĄƪs2hh :s2vvƫĄƪs3hh :s3vvƫĄ.Ą.Ą.ĄƪsMhh :sMvvƫWe will assume that M samples are collected for processing, i.e., Note that even though there iscross–polarized radiation received in each channel, this cross–polar contribution can beneglected since the co-polarized received signal is much stronger.Calculation of the Polarization MeasurandsThe processing in this case is done by pulse pair mode. However both FFT and random phaseprocessing can be performed if only ZDR and standard moments are requested for ouput. In anymode, the user may select a clutter filter, but in general this is not recommended for polarizationmeasurements since the clutter filter might interfere with the accuracy of sensitive parameterssuch as ZDR.The RVP8 calculates the following polarization parameters:ZDR +10ĄLOGĄƪShhSvvƫZDR +10ĄLOGĄƪt|shh|2u*Nht|svv|2u*NvƫĄ)GDRRHOHV +|òhv(0)|PHIDP +arg[òhv(0)]KDP based on least squares fit to PHIDP (see Section 5.7.10).where the following definitions are used:grhgthĄShh +t |shh|2u*NhgrvgtvĄSvv +t |svv|2u*NvThe noise powers the two channels are denoted as Nh and Nv . The noise corrections to Shh andSvv are optionally configured in the TTY setups.  GDR is the total (transmit and receive)differential channel gain. It must be calibrated for the system.dBĄValueĄisĄĄGDR +10ĄLOGĄxdrĄĄĄwhereĄtheĄlinearĄvalueĄisĄĄĄgdrĄ+ĄgrvgtvgrhgthThe correlation function is computed from:òhv(0) +tsvvĄs*hh uShhSvvǸThe gain terms cancel in the calculation of ρ so in the implementation they are simply assumedto be =1.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–475.7.7  Case 3: Alternating H/V Transmit: Single-Channel ReceiverInput Receiver SamplesThis is the traditional ZDR radar with a high-power fast switch that alternates betweenhorizontal and vertical on each pulse. The switch is made just prior to the transmit pulse so thatthe transmitter radiates and then receives at a single polarization for each pulse. Thus thesamples are:s1hh s2vv s3hh   . . . sM)1vvFor the discussion below we will assume that there are M+1 total samples with M/2 horizontalpulses indexed by (1, 2, 3...M–1) and M/2+1 vertical pulses indexed at (2, 4, 6, ...M). Note thatthe processor does not  assume that the first pulse in a sequence is horizontal.Calculation of the Polarization MeasurandsThe processing is done in pulse pair with optional clutter filter. Again, for accurate ZDRmeasurements, the clutter  filter may interfere.The RVP8 calculates the following:ZDR +10ĄLOGĄƪShhSvvƫZDR +10ĄLOGĄƪt|shh|2u*Nht|svv|2u*NvƫĄ)GDRPHIDP +12Ą argĄƪRaĄR*bƫRHOHV +|òhv(Ts)|Ąƪòhv(2Ts)ƫ0.25KDP based on least squares fit to PHIDP (see Section 5.7.10).where the following definitions are used:|òhv(Ts)| +|Ra|)|Rb|2ShhSvvǸò(2Ts)+ŤȍMń2*1n+1(s*hh[2n*1]Ąshh[2n)1]Ą )Ąs*vv[2n]Ąsvv[2n)2])Ť(Mń2*1)(Shh )Svv)Ra+1Mń2ȍMń2n+1s2n*1hh *s2nvv               and     Rb+1Mń2ȍMń2n+1s2nvv *s2n)1hhThe calculation of the channel powers (t|shh|2u and t|svv|2u) is done using alternatingpulses in this case. Note that in the calculation of Rb, the RVP8 uses the extra M+1 sample. Thegain terms cancel in the calculation of ρ so in the implementation they are simply assumed to be=1.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–485.7.8  Case 4: Alternating H/V Transmit: Dual-Channel ReceiverInput Receiver SamplesThis is the most comprehensive case of polarization operation since it permits calculation of allof the polarization measurands. In this case the transmitter alternates pulse-to-pulse betweenhorizontal and vertical polarization and the dual-channel receiver provides measurement of boththe co- and the cross-polarized return, i.e.,ƪs1hh :s1vhƫĄƪs2vv :s2hvƫĄƪs3hh :s3vhƫĄƪs3vv :s3hvƫĄ.Ą.Ą.ĄƪsM)1vv :sM)1hv ƫWe will assume that M+1 samples are collected for processing (an extra sample is required forthe calculation Rb per section 5.7.7).Calculation of the Polarization MeasurandsThe RVP8 calculates the following:Co-polar channel measurementsZDR, PHIDP, RHOHV Identical to alternating case Section 5.7.7.Cross-polar channel measurementsLDRH, LDRV, RHOH, RHOV, PHIH, PHIV Identical to fixed case Section 5.7.9The co-polar channel measurements are exactly as they are for the alternating single-receivercase. The cross–polar measurements are calculated using fixed case algorithms except  they arecalculated for BOTH H and V polarizations.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–495.7.10  KDP CalculationIn all modes that compute PHIDP, the signal processor can also be configured to compute KDP-the specific differential phase in units of degrees per km. This is the range derivative of PHIDP.There are two techniques that have been used to obtain this:SThe smoothed range derivative.SThe slope from a least squares fit.The RVP8 uses the least squares approach which is shown schematically in the figure below.RangeΦDPLength LRKDP(one way)= slope/2The graph shows the thresholded differential phase vs range. This is the starting point for thealgorithm. The length scale L is selectable by the user in the TTY setups (mp section, KDPLength in km, default 5.00 km). The KDP value for a bin at range R is computed from a leastsquares fit that includes points that are within +–L/2 as indicated in the figure.  PHIDP is outputby the processor on the unambiguous interval of 0 to 180 degrees. Before fitting, the points arefirst unfolded to a common interval by starting at the left-most point and then moving rightassuming that a difference of more than 1/2 the unambiguous interval is the result of folding.Since it is the slope that is of interest, the absolute interval is not critical, as long as the pointsare in a common interval.After fitting, the slope is obtained which corresponds to the 2-way KDP since it is based on the2-way measurement of PHIDP . To be consistent with most values in the literature, the slopevalue is divided by 2 so that the final output is the one-way KDP in degrees per km (with awavelength scaling in the data format).This procedure is repeated for each bin. Thus if the bin spacing is 250 m, the output bin spacingof KDP will be 250 m. It is required that there be at least 50% of the possible number of binspresent in the interval L to calculate a valid KDP, else the KDP is set to the threshold value.Since the input PHIDP values are already thresholded, the only additional threshold on KDP isthis 50% rule.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–505.7.11  Standard Moment Calculations (T, Z, V, W)OverviewStandard moments are available for all four of the polarization cases. Since there can be up tofour different channels of time series input, there are several choices for computing the standardmoments. For example, in the STAR mode (Case 2), the standard moments can be computedfrom:Sshh samplesSsvv samplesSAverage of the results from the shh and svv samplesThe third case is handled by averaging the individual channel correlations, and then using theaverage correlations in the standard moment processing. The averaging must take into accountthe differential gain of the channels.The selection of which method to use is made in setup. There are four questions posed in the mpsection:T/Z/V/W computed from:   H–Xmt:YES   V–Xmt:YES T/Z/V/W computed from:   Co–Rcv:YES  Cx–Rcv:NOThe first two questions are used to specify that given a choice between vertical and horizontaltransmit, which transmit polarization to use. Thus for the fixed H or V case where there is onlyone transmit polarization, this question does not apply. The processor will simply use samplesfor the polarization is transmitted.The second two questions are used to specify that given a choice between using the co- orcross-polar receivers which one shall be used. This question applies only to systems that canmeasure LDR, i.e., fixed or alternating transmit, dual-channel receiver systems).The tables in the sections below summarize the standard moment calculations for each of thefour modes and how to configure the four TTY setup responses. Note that these are the onlysupported modes. Some combinations of responses are unsupported. For example, it is notsupported to answer both Co-Rcv: NO and Cx-Rcv: NO.The top of each table identifies the transmitter/receiver case and what samples are available. Thenotation HH signifies that the shh samples are available. The tables use “–––” to indicate thateither a YES or NO response will cause the same result, i.e., the RVP does not care whatresponse is made. In cases where averaging is performed, the type of weighting used is indicated(either GDR or XDR weighting).
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–51Model for standard moment autocorrelationsThe model for the moment autocorrelation calculations is as follows (using Ro as an example):Rhh0Ą+ĄgrhĄgthĄShh )NhRvh0Ą+ĄgrvĄgthĄSvh )NvRvv0Ą+ĄgrvĄgtvĄSvv )NvRhv0Ą+ĄgrhĄgtvĄShv )Nhwhere:Rhh0,Ą Rvh0,Ą Rvv0,Ą Rhv0Are the autocorrelations if the samples at lag zero.Shh,Ą Svh,Ą Svv,Ą Shv The average power returned from the scatterers.grh,Ą grvReceiver gains for horizontal and vertical receive.gth,Ą gtvTransmitter gains for horizontal and vertical transmit.Nh,Ą NvMeasured noise power of the samples.In other words, the power that is measured in a channel has two components:SBackscattered power from the targets that is effected by the transmitter andreceiver channel gains.SReceiver noise which is measured by the RVP8 during noise sampling.In the case of R1 and R2 autocorrelations, the model is similar except that there is no noise bias.Calibration ParametersFor dBZ calculations, a calibration constant is required, i.e., the dBZo value  in Section 5.4.Depending on the polarization case and the technique selected for standard moment calculation,it may also be required to have GDR and XDR, i.e.,SGDR- The ratio of the total gains (transmit/receive) of the two co–receivechannels.SXDR- The ratio of the receiver gains in a dual receiver system. This is notrequired for the Case 2: STAR or the Case 3: Alternating Single–Channel.The RVP8 supports a single calibration reflectivity dBZo. In all cases it is assumed that the dBZois for the horizontal co–receive (HH) channel. The only exception is for fixed verticalpolarization, in which the algorithm assumes that the calibration is for the vertical co-receive(VV) channel. XDR and GDR are also downloaded and used to adjust the dBZo as requireddepending on the user’s selection for the standard moments. For example, in STAR mode, if theuser selects dBZ to be computed from the VV channel, the dBZo for the HH and a GDRadjustment are used to calculate the dBZ in the VV channel.The remainder of this section discusses the standard moment calculation options for the eachpolarization case. For a discussion of how to calibrate XDR and GDR see Section 5.7.13.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–52Case 1H: Fixed Horizontal Transmit, Dual Channel ReceiveĆ (HH, VH)dBZo from HH Channel TTY Setup Question ResponsesCalculate T, Z, V, W from: H–Xmt V–Xmt Co–Rcv Cx–RcvHH (co) (Recommended) ––– ––– YES NOVH (xdr–1 weighting) ––– ––– NO YESHH+VH (xdr–1 weighting) ––– ––– YES YESHH Channel (co–pol)This is the recommended channel for the case of linear polarization. The reason is that for linearpolarization, the co–polar channel will have the strongest signal. Processing is identical to aconventional radar.VH Channel (cross–pol)This choice would be used for circular or elliptic transmit polarization. Since the algorithmassumes that dBZo is from the co–polar channel, xdr is used to adjust the autocorrelations asfollows:T0Ą+Ąxdr*1ĄTvhoR0Ą+Ąxdr*1ĄRvhoR1Ą+Ąxdr*1ĄRvh1R2Ą+Ąxdr*1ĄRvh2NĄ+Ąxdr*1ĄNvThese adjusted autocorrelations are then used as per the standard moment processing for aconventional radar. To illustrate this, consider the example of reflectivity processing. The radarequation can be written as (see section 5.2.5):Zvh +CSvh r2+ƪCr20Nvgrvgthƫƪr2r2oƫƪTvho*NvNvƫ, where Tvh0+grvgthSvh *Nv+ƪCr20Nhgrhgthƫƪr2r2oƫƪgrhgrvƫƪTvho*NvNhƫThe third term is simply 1/XDR so that we can write:Zvh +ƪCr20Nhgrhgthƫƪr2r2oƫƪxdr*1Tvho*xdr*1NvNhƫIn this case, the first term is the dBZo for the HH channel. Thus we can use the dBZo for the HHchannel to calibrate the cross-channel, if we first adjust the cross–channel noise and power by1/XDR and then normalize by Nh. The reflectivity calculation assumes that the calibrated XDRvalue compensates for any differences in the radar constant between the two channels, i.e., we donot need to have separate radar constants for the two channels.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–53HH+VH ChannelsThis choice would be used for elliptic transmit polarizations that give comparable return signalin both the co- and cross-channels. The approach is to obtain average autocorrelation functionsas follows:T0Ą+ĄThho)xdr*1ĄTvho2R0Ą+ĄRhho)xdr*1ĄRvho2R1Ą+ĄRhh1)xdr*1ĄRvh12R2Ą+ĄRhh2)xdr*1ĄRvh22NĄ+ĄNh)xdr*1ĄNv2These adjusted autocorrelations are then used as per the standard moment processing forcalibration with respect to the HH channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–54Case 1V: Fixed Vertical Transmit and Dual Channel ReceiveĆ (VV, HV)dBZo from VV Channel TTY Setup Question ResponsesCalculate T, Z, V, W from: H–Xmt V–Xmt Co–Rcv Cx–RcvVV (co) ––– ––– YES NOHV (xdr weighting) ––– ––– NO YESVV+HV (xdr weighting) ––– ––– YES YESThis is the only case for which the calibration constant dBZo for the VV channel should bedownloaded to the signal processor.VV Channel (co–pol)This is the recommended channel for the case of linear polarization. The reason is that for linearpolarization, the co-polar channel will have the strongest signal. Processing is identical to aconventional radar.HV Channel (cross–pol)This choice would be used for circular or elliptic transmit polarization when most of the return isin the cross-pol channel. Since the algorithm assumes that dBZo is from the co-polar channel,xdr is used to adjust the autocorrelations as follows:T0Ą+ĄxdrĄThvoR0Ą+ĄxdrĄRhvoR1Ą+ĄxdrĄRhv1R2Ą+ĄxdrĄRhv2NĄ+ĄxdrĄNhThese adjusted autocorrelations are then used as per the standard moment processing with dBZocalibrated with respect to the VV channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–55VV+HV ChannelsThis choice would be used for elliptic transmit polarizations that give comparable return signalin both the co- and cross-channels. The approach is to obtain average autocorrelation functionsas follows:T0Ą+ĄTvvo)xdrĄThvo2R0Ą+ĄRvvo)xdrĄRhvo2R1Ą+ĄRvv1)xdrĄRhv12R2Ą+ĄRvv2)xdrĄRhv22NĄ+ĄNv)xdrĄNh2These adjusted autocorrelations are then used as input to the standard moment processingalgorithms with dBZo calibrated with respect to the VV channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–56Case 2: Simultaneous Transmit and ReceiveĆ STAR (HH, VV)Case 3: Alternating Transmit SingleĆChannel Receive (HH, VV)dBZo from HH Channel TTY Setup Question ResponsesCalculate T, Z, V, W from: H–Xmt V–Xmt Co–Rcv Cx–RcvHH YES NO ––– –––VV (gdr–1 weighting) NO YES ––– –––HH+VV (gdr–1 weighting) YES YES ––– –––A fundamental difference between these two cases is that for all standard moment processingchoices, the STAR case has double the number of samples as compared to the single-channelalternating case. However, the processing is otherwise identical.HH ChannelSince the HH channel is directly calibrated this is the recommended choice. Processing isidentical to a conventional radar.VV ChannelIn this case, GDR is used to adjust the autocorrelations as follows:T0Ą+Ągdr*1ĄTvvoR0Ą+Ągdr*1ĄRvvoR1Ą+Ągdr*1ĄRvv1R2Ą+Ągdr*1ĄRvv2NĄ+Ągdr*1ĄNvThese adjusted autocorrelations are then used as input to the  standard moment processingalgorithms with dBZo calibrated with respect to the HH channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–57HH+VV ChannelsThis approach gives the benefit of doubling the number of samples used for the reflectivitycalculation.T0Ą+ĄThho)gdr*1ĄTvvo2R0Ą+ĄRhho)gdr*1ĄRvvo2R1Ą+ĄRhh1)gdr*1ĄRvv12R2Ą+ĄRhh2)gdr*1ĄRvv22NĄ+ĄNh)gdr*1ĄNv2These adjusted autocorrelations are then used as input to the  standard moment processingalgorithms with dBZo calibrated with respect to the HH channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–58Case 4: Alternating DualĆChannel (HH, VH, VV, HV)dBZo from HH Channel TTY Setup Question ResponsesCalculate T, Z, V, W from: H–Xmt V–Xmt Co–Rcv Cx–RcvHH YES NO YES NOVH (xdr–1 weighting) YES NO NO YESVV (gdr–1 weighting) NO YES YES NOHV (xdr/gdr weighting) NO YES NO YESHH+VV (gdr–1 weighting) YES YES YES NOHV+VH (xdr & gdr weighting) YES YES NO YESHH ChannelSince the HH channel is directly calibrated this is the recommended choice. Processing isidentical to a conventional radar.VH ChannelProcessing is identical to Case 1H: Horizontal Transmit  HV Processing.VV ChannelProcessing is identical to Cases 2&3:STAR and Single Channel Alternating VV Processing.HV ChannelThe weighting in this case uses both xdr and GDR.T0Ą+ĄxdrgdrĄThvoR0Ą+ĄxdrgdrĄRhvoR1Ą+ĄxdrgdrĄRhv1R2Ą+ĄxdrgdrĄRhv2NĄ+ĄxdrgdrĄNhThese adjusted autocorrelations are then used as input to the  standard moment processingalgorithms with dBZo calibrated with respect to the HH channel.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–59HH + VV ChannelsProcessing is identical to Cases 2&3: STAR and Single Channel Alternating HH+VVProcessing.HV + VH ProcessingThe weighting here has to correct for both transmitter and receiver effects in order to use the HHchannel dBZo.T0Ą+Ąxdrgdr Thvo)xdr*1ĄTvho2R0Ą+Ąxdrgdr Rhvo)xdr*1ĄRvho2R1Ą+Ąxdrgdr Rhv1)xdr*1ĄRvh12R2Ą+Ąxdrgdr Rhv2)xdr*1ĄRvh22NĄ+Ąxdrgdr Nh)xdr*1ĄNv2These adjusted autocorrelations are then used as input to the  standard moment processingalgorithms with dBZo calibrated with respect to the HH channel.An example of how this weighted averaging works is given here. Suppose that we want tocompute the average of the reflectivities for the VH and HV channels,Zhv)vh +Cr2Shv )Svh2+Cr2Thv0*Nhgrhgtv)Tvho*Nvgrvgth2+Cr2grhgth(Thv0*Nh)gthgtv)(Tvho*Nv)grhgrv2but since xdr +grvghvand gdr +grvgtvgrhgthZvh)hv +Cr2grhgthȧȱȲxdrgdr Thv0)xdr*1Tvh02*xdrgdr Nh)xdr*1Nv2ȧȳȴZvh)hv +Cr2grhgthƪT0*Nƫ+ƪCr2oNhgrhgthƫƪr2r2oƫƪT0*NNhƫThe first term in brackets is precisely dBZo for the HH channel. Thus if we average thecorrelations using the appropriate GDR and xdr weighting as shown above, then the averagereflectivity is obtained by using conventional processing with the HH channel dBZo.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–605.7.12  Thresholding of Polarization ParametersThe thresholding of polarization parameters by the processor eliminates bins with weak oruncertain signals. Note that the thresholding can be disabled if it is desired to see all of the dataregardless of the data quality.All of the polarization parameters are based on power ratios. The RVP8 requires that each powerterm in a ratio pass a signal-to-noise test similar to the log power test. For example, there are upto four different powers that can be calculated (alternating dual-channel case) so the tests foreach of these are:t|shh|2uNhĄuĄNthresht|shv|2uNhĄuĄNthresht|svv|2uNvĄuĄNthresht|svh|2uNhĄuĄNthreshwhere the linearized threshold that is input as the dB LOG threshold, i.e.,NthreshĄ+Ą10LOGthreshń10For example, a valid LDRH requires both a valid Shh and a valid Svh. The parameters RHOHand PHIH have the same requirement since they are the magnitude and phase of thecross-correlation function which is based on Shh and Svh.There are two exceptions:ZDRZDR requires that both Shh and Svv pass the signal-to-noise tests noted above. However,ZDR can be additionally thresholded by any of the other threshold parameters (LOG, SIG,SQI, CSR) similar to a standard moment. See section 5.3 for a description of the standardmoment thresholding.PHIDP for single channel alternating casePHIDP requires that both Shh and Svv pass the signal-to-noise tests noted above. In the singlechannel alternating case, PHIDP must also satisfy the additional test that the Doppler veloc-ity at the range bin must be valid, i.e., not thresholded by its own criteria. This is becausethe algorithm for PHIDP in this case essentially subtracts the phase change due to the Dop-pler velocity. If the Doppler velocity is uncertain, the algorithm cannot produce reliable re-sults.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–615.7.13  Calibration ConsiderationsPolarization systems require additional calibration as compared to conventional systems. Thereare three aspects to the calibration:SdBZo measurement in both channels for dBZ and dBT calibration.SGDR measurement for ZDR calibration.Sxdr measurement for LDR calibration.These are discussed below.dBZoCalibration for dBZThe RVP8 supports separate calibration of both polarization channels. Measurement  of dBZoforeach channel of  a dual polarization system is identical to the conventional radar case describedin Section 5.4. Note that for a single-channel switching system, the only difference between thehorizontal and vertical signal paths occurs after the high power switch, i.e., differential insertionloss of the switch itself and any differential insertion loss of the waveguides and feed after theswitch. This means that for single-channel switching systems it may be sufficient to calibrate atone polarization and then adjust the calibration of the other channel by the differential gain GDR(see below).GDR Calibration for ZDRGDR is the relative between the co-polarized channels including both transmitter and receivergain, i.e.,GDRĄ+Ą 10ĄLOGĄgrvgtvgrhgthand   gdrĄ+ĄgrvgtvgrhgthGDR is input into the processor as a dB value. However, for analyses in this chapter, the lineargdr value is sometimes more convenient.In principle, if dBZo could be calibrated perfectly in both channels, measurement of GDR wouldnot be required. In practice, this is not possible because dBZo cannot be calibrated to an absoluteaccuracy sufficient for ZDR, i.e., to 1/16th of a dB. Therefore, the RVP8 uses the GDRapproach.Since GDR includes both transmitter and receiver differential gains, accurate calibration requiresthat an actual target be observed. One way to do this is as follows:SSet the GDR to be 0 dB using your application software (e.g., for SIGMET IRISsystems in the setup utility RVP section). Disable clutter filtering for ZDR ineither your application software (by selecting filter 0) or explicitly in the RVP8TTY setups mp section.SPlace the antenna at 90 degrees elevation (vertical incidence) during moderate toheavy rain. The melting layer should be at a height that is well above the recoveryzone of the T/R and in the antenna “far zone”. A melting layer higher than 2 kmis suggested, but the specific characteristics of the radar should be considered.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–62SCollect ZDR data at vertical incidence while the antenna is rotating in azimuth.SUse a separate application program to average the ZDR values around a full 360degrees at each range bin (height). Generate a plot of 360-average ZDR vs height.SYou should observe that the average ZDR values in regions of strong signal (>20dB SNR) below the bright band are approximately constant with height.  This isthe value that should be used in your application software for GDR.SEnter the value and repeat the calibration to verify that the average ZDR is now 0dB.The rationale for this approach is as follows. When viewed at vertical incidence, rain shouldhave a ZDR of 0 dB since the drops will all appear circular. The reason for averaging over 360degrees is to cancel-out effects from sidelobe contamination from nearby ground targets andother artifacts of the antenna/feed/radome system. For example the radome may have anobstruction light on the top. Some of these artifacts can be minimized by assuring the theweather targets are strong, i.e., heavy rain is preferred for this calibration.XDR Calibration for LDRXDR is the relative gain in dB between the co- and cross-receiver channels for LDRmeasurements. Analogous to GDR, it is defined as the dB value of the ratio of the vertical tohorizontal receiver gains, i.e.,XDRĄ+Ą 10ĄLOGĄgrvgrhand   xdrĄ+ĄgrvgrhThree techniques for calibration of XDR are discussed. It is recommended for the transmitter tobe off for all of these methods.S1. Solar methodUse the sun to measure LDR. The measured value of LDR is then the XDR offset.LDR should be measured in fixed mode for both LDRH and LDRV. The valuesshould be reciprocal (e.g., +1 dB and –1 dB). Use the average of the absolutevalue if they are not precisely reciprocal (e.g., for +1.4 and –1.2 use 1.3). Finallyafter inputting the XDR value, retest to verify that the sun has been properlycorrected to have zero LDR.S2. Signal generator method with connection to waveguideConnect a signal generator with a splitter to both channels and measure XDRdirectly. This does not account for any effects that are before the coupler (e.g.,waveguide, feed, radome, antenna gain).S3. Linear feed horn remote radiator methodUse a calibrated linear feed horn with an RF source located several hundredmeters from the radar. Maximize the H channel return and measure the responseusing the RVP8 pr command “Filtered” power in the “Primary Channel”. Nowrotate the feed horn to vertical and maximize the power in the “SecondaryChannel”. The difference in dB is XDR. Note that signal multi–path effects couldbias the results from this technique.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–63In all cases it is recommended that for the calibration, XDR be set to 0 dB in the application usersoftware and that the RVP8 TTY setups be configured as follows:SNoise correction enabled for LDR and noise sample taken prior to themeasurements (with care not to sample with a test signal turned–on or whilelooking at the sun).SClutter correction disabled for LDR.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–645.8  FFT Mode5.8.1  OverviewThe RVP8 can perform FFT processing of the I and Q time series. This is indicated by the insetbox in Figure 5–1. The major difference between FFT and pulse pair processing is the way inwhich clutter filtering is performed. The pulse pair mode uses a time domain IIR filter while theFFT mode uses a frequency domain filter. The advantage of the FFT approach is that it is lessdestructive to overlapped weather (near zero velocity) than the IIR filter since the clutter filteralgorithm attempts to interpolate over the weather (see Figure 5–8). This results in more accurateestimates of velocity, width and clutter correction. Because the clutter correction is moreaccurate, the resulting reflectivity estimates are more accurate.Figure 5–8: Comparison of Pulse Pair and FFT Clutter FiltersUnfiltered Doppler SpectrumPulse Pair ModeSpectrum after  IIR filterFFT ModeSpectrum after frequency domain filteringwith interpolation0+Vu-VuVelocityPower
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–655.8.2  FFT ImplementationFigure 5–9 shows a data flow diagram for the FFT processing. In the example,  50 pulses of Iand Q are processed. Recall that the I and Q samples refer to a single range bin with an I and Qsample generated for each pulse.Sampling DivisionThe first step of processing is to split the I and Q values into two groups. The FFT algorithmrequires the number of samples to be a power of two. This is not very convenient for radarsampling since it effectively quantizes the scan rates to be powers of two. The processing by theRVP8 allows an arbitrary number of pulses to be handled by splitting the samples into twogroups — the first 2N and last 2N pulses. An FFT is performed on each group and then theresults are averaged. This allows an arbitrary number of samples to be processed. The maximumnumber of samples is 255 which corresponds to performing FFT’s on two groups of 128 pulseswith 1 sample of overlap.If the requested number of pulses is exactly a power of 2, then the samples are not split and onlya single FFT is done.Window and FFTAfter splitting the samples, a weighting function, or window, is applied. The FFT algorithm isthen applied and the magnitude squared of each component is calculated to yield the Dopplerpower spectrum. Figure 5–10 shows the response of the Doppler power spectrum to a groundclutter target for each of the three available FFT windows. The schematic Doppler spectra in theexample do not show the details of the side lobe structure of the impulse response (seeOppenheim and Schafer, 1975 p. 243–245).SRectangular Window — This is really the no-window case since it is equivalentto multiplying each sample by 1. This window has a sinx/x type impulseresponse, i.e., the impulse response is very narrow which is good, but the sidelobes of the Doppler spectrum are rather high — ~20 dB near the peak. Thus it isnot the best choice for high performance clutter cancelation since the highsidelobes will mask weak weather targets.SHamming Window — This common window is well matched to magnetronsystems. The peak of the impulse response is broader than that for the rectangularwindow, but it has –40 dB peak-to-noise sidelobes. Weak weather targets abovethis level will not be obscured by these sidelobes. The phase noise of a magnetronsystem (~1 degree) will typically be slightly larger than the sidelobes caused bythe window which means that the window is well matched to the magnetronperformance.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–66Figure 5–9: FFT Processing — 50 pulse exampleExample of 50 pulse input time series where An = In + j QnA1A2A3A4A5... A45 A46 A47 A48 A49 A5032  pointFFT32  pointFFTAverage 32Ćpoint Spectrum1st. 32 samples Last 32 samplesClutter CancelationInverse TransformR0R1R2T0Standard ProcessingWindow and FFT Window and FFT
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–67Figure 5–10: Effect of Windowing on FFT Response to Ground ClutterRectangular Window-20-40-60-800dB PowerHamming Window-20-40-60-800dB PowerBlackman Window-20-40-60-800dB PowerVelocity0+Vu-VuSBlackman Window — This is the most aggressive window for cluttercancelation and is appropriate only for Klystron systems that can achieve verylow phase noise (~0.1 degree). The peak is the broadest of all the windows, butthe side lobes are the lowest. It is not recommended for magnetron systemsexcept for performance testing.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–68FFT AveragingThe power spectrum from the first group of samples is averaged with the power spectrum fromthe last group of samples. Note that if the total number of samples is exactly a power of two,then this step is skipped. Averaging the two power spectra from the overlapping sample groupseffectively captures the information from all of the samples. The result is a smoother powerspectrum than weather of the individual spectra.Clutter CancellationThe clutter cancelation is done by an interpolation technique shown in Figure 5–11. In general,the technique discards a selectable number of center points. The algorithm then takes theminimum value of a selectable number of edge points next to the discarded points. Theminimum value on each side is used to interpolate across the points that were removed.Figure 5–11: Example of FFT Clutter Filter in Frequency DomainSpectrum with ground clutter-20-40-600dB PowerVelocity0+Vu-VuRemove 5 interior points-20-40-600dB PowerFind minimum of 2 edge pointsInterpolate across 5 center points-20-40-600dB Power
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–69This procedure preserves the noise level and/or overlapped weather targets. The result is thatmore accurate estimates of dBZ are obtained. In extreme cases when the weather spectrum isvery narrow, there can still be some attenuation of weather of a broad filter is selected.Inverse TransformAfter clutter removal, an inverse DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) is performed to obtain theautocorrelations R0, R1 and R2 (optional). The total power T0 in the unfiltered power spectrumis also computed by summing the spectrum components. Thus the final output of the FFTapproach is identical to the pulse pair approach except that the clutter filtering is performed inthe frequency domain.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–705.9  Random Phase 2nd Trip Processing5.9.1  OverviewSecond trip echoes can be a serious problem for applications when the radar is operated at highPRF (e.g., >500 Hz). Second trip echoes are caused by the range aliasing of targets. They appearas false echoes on the display, usually elongated in the radial direction. On Klystron systemsthey will have valid Doppler velocities. On magnetron systems, the Doppler velocities are notvalid, but the noise from the 2nd trip echoes can obscure valid first trip velocity information.The RVP8 has optional random phase processing for the filtering and recovery of second tripechoes. Details of the technique are proprietary to SIGMET, Inc. However, the general principleis described here, along with a discussion of the various configuration options to optimize thealgorithm performance.The information that is used to separate the first and second trip echoes is the phase. For amagnetron radar, the phase of each pulse is different. This means that when 1st. and 2nd tripechoes are received simultaneously, the phase of the first trip return is different from the phaseof the second trip return. For a magnetron radar, the RVP8 measures the phase of the transmittedpulse and the phase locking is done digitally as opposed to the traditionally locking COHO. Fora Klystron radar, the phase is controlled by the RVP8 via a digital phase shifter that is preciselycalibrated. Typically the Klystron COHO is phase shifted so that each transmit pulse has adifferent phase. The sequencing is controlled by the RVP8.5.9.2  AlgorithmFigure 5–12 shows a schematic of the data processing for random phase. The figure shows theDoppler spectra for the 1st. and 2nd trip in the various processing stages. The vertical scale is indB and the horizontal scale is velocity. In this example, the second trip echo is shown as beingstronger than the first trip echo (usually the reverse is true).Ideal 1st and 2nd Trip EchoesThe ideal 1st and 2nd trip echoes represent the echoes as they would appear individually. Theideal 1st trip echo is the echo that would be measured if there were no 2nd trip echo interference.The ideal 2nd trip echo represents what would be measured if there were no 1st trip echointerference. If there is no interference from the other trip, a standard Klystron system canmeasure the ideal spectra, but there is no way to know whether the echoes are in the 1st or 2ndtrip.Raw 1st and 2nd Trip EchoesThis figure shows how the echoes from the first trip and second trip interfere with each other.For the case of a standard magnetron system, the first trip echo is coherent, while the second tripecho is incoherent (white noise) since the phase of the second trip echo is random. This isbecause the receiver is phase locked only to the first trip.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–71Another way to implement a magnetron system is to let the COHO free-run (rather than phaselocking to the transmit pulse), measure the phase of each transmit pulse and digitally correctingfor the transmit phase. Using this digital phase locking technique, the RVP8 can phase lock or“cohere” to either the first or the second trip.Using this technique alone, it is possible to distinguish between 1st and 2nd trip echoes for thecase when the echoes are not overlapped. In other words, the echoes will appear as the idealized1st and 2nd trip echoes. This range de-aliasing effectively doubles the range of the radar. Theproblem is that when echoes are overlapped, the noise contamination from the stronger echo willmake it impossible to measure the weaker echo. This is illustrated in the figure. Thus if the firsttrip echo has a good signal-to-noise ratio of 10 dB, then the 2nd trip echo will have a signal-tonoise-ratio no better than –10 dB. This is the fundamental problem with using phase alone toseparate the 1st and 2nd trip echoes.Filtered 1st and 2nd Trip EchoesSince the strong echo generates noise that obscures the weaker echo, the approach used in theRVP8 is to filter the echo from the other trip — the whitening filter. This is shown in the figure.The adaptive whitening filter removes both the clutter and the weather. All of the phaseinformation for the other trip is then contained in the white noise portion of the spectrum. Notethat the phase information under the coherent echo that is removed will be dominated by thecoherent echo, i.e., the other trip phase information will be contaminated. For this reason, thefiltering should effect as small a region of the spectrum as possible.5.9.3  Tuning for Optimal PerformanceThe Random Phase algorithms are controlled by the same collection of setup and operationalparameters that apply to all of the other processing modes, e.g., choice of sample size, clutterfilter, angle sync, calibration, etc.  However, a few parameters are special to Random Phasemode, and these are described below.Secondary SQI ThresholdIn standard Doppler processing, an SQI threshold is normally not applied to Reflectivity databecause it would cause those data to be rejected in regions of high spectral width.  In RandomPhase mode we need to relax this convention because reflected power can only be assigned to aparticular trip when it is coherent within that trip.  Incoherent echoes, regardless of theirstrength, can not be placed into either trip.Thus, an SQI threshold is required to qualify Reflectivity data in Random Phase mode.  TheRVP8 defines a secondary SQI threshold SQI2 which is computed from the standard thresholdvalue simply as:SQI2+Offset )(Slope  SQI)Where Slope and Offset are the Random Phase SQI threshold parameters defined in the Mfsetup section.  The factory default values are (Slope +0.50)  and (Offset +*0.05), i.e., thesecondary threshold is a little less than half of the standard value.  The Random Phase
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–72algorithms check whether the SQI of each recovered trip is less than the secondary SQIthreshold, and if so, the LOG portion of the data are rejected.  This SQI test is necessary for aclean LOG picture, but we need to use a more permissive (lower) threshold value than wouldusually be applied to the Doppler data alone.The Slope and Offset values should be adjusted so that the density of speckles in Random PhaseLOG data is approximately the same as the density of speckles in FFT velocity data for a givenprimary SQI value.  You may then adjust the primary SQI threshold to achieve the appropriatetradeoff of speckles vs. sensitivity for your system in all modes of operation.  Even with properadjustment, it is normal for Random Phase dBZ and dBT  data to show “holes” in regions ofweather that have high turbulence or shear.  These dropouts will usually match up with similargaps in the velocity and width data, both of which are traditionally thresholded by SQI.Maximum Power Ratio Between TripsThe adaptive filtering that is performed on the data for each trip greatly extends the visibility ofa weak echo that is overlapped with a much stronger one.  In practice, the filtering process isoften able to remove 25-35dB of dominant power in order to reveal a much weaker echo in theother trip.  The performance depends on many factors, primarily the spectral width of thedominant echo, and the overall stability of the radar system.The difficulties of removing a dominant “other trip” echo from a weather signal are analogous tothe challenge of removing a dominant clutter target from that same signal.  In both cases we aretrying to extract a weak weather signature using a filtering procedure that relies on the spectralconfinement of the stronger signal.  The RVP8 already has a parameter that can be adjusted tocontrol sub-clutter visibility, i.e., the Clutter-to-Signal Ratio (CSR).  Just as the CSR applies tothe clutter filters,  it can likewise be used to place similar limits on the depth of visibility of theadaptive filters.As an example, suppose that the RVP8 is operating in Random Phase mode at a PRF of 1500Hz,and is observing widespread weather having uniform intensity in both the first 100Km trip andthe second 100Km trip.  If the CSR were set too conservatively at only 15dB, then the algorithmwould generally be blind to second-trip weather in the range interval from 100km to 117.8km.The explanation for this can be found in the 1ńr2 geometric correction for weather echointensity.  At ranges less than 17.8km, the first trip weather would generally dominate the secondtrip weather by more than 15dB.  Thus, the initial 17.8km ring of second trip data would berejected by the CSR criteria.  However, if the CSR were increased to 30dB, then the size of thismissing ring would be reduced to only 3.2km.If the CSR is set too low you will notice an abrupt ring of missing data in the beginning of thesecond trip.  If set too high, there will be speckles and other spurious effects within this sameinterval.  The optimum setting should strike a balance between these two effects.R1 vs. R2 AlgorithmsThe Random Phase algorithms for adaptive filtering and separation of trips relies on having thebest possible information about the weather’s SNR and spectral width.  Thus, the “R2” Doppleralgorithms are always used, regardless of the setting of the R1/R2 flag in the user’s operationalparameters.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–73Random Phase and Dual PRFThe random phase processing works seamlessly with the dual PRF processing to provideadvanced range and velocity ambiguity resolution. Both the first and 2nd trip echoes can berecovered and displayed to a maximum range of 2X the unambiguous range corresponding to thehigh PRF.For optimum performance, the 2D 3x3 speckle filter should be used to smooth the 2nd tripseams that occur for each ray. In fact, this smoothing of the 2nd trip seam makes the dual PRFrandom phase  mode work even better than the single PRF random phase.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–74Figure 5–12: Random Phase Processing AlgorithmIdeal 1st Trip Ideal 2nd TripRaw 1st Trip with  Raw 2nd Trip withFiltered 1st Trip Filtered 2nd TripInverse Transfrom2nd Trip Noise Contamination 1st Trip Noise Contaminationand ReĆCohereRecovered 1st Trip Recovered 2nd Trip
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–755.10  Signal Generator Testing of the AlgorithmsThis section describes a variety of IF signal generator tests that can be used to verify correctnessof the RVP8 processing algorithms.  These tests are routinely performed at SIGMET whenevernew algorithms and/or major modes are added to the processor.  We have include a few of thetest descriptions here so that they can be used by customers who need to debug their systems, orwho want to better understand how they work.  Additional tests for receiver sensitivity anddynamic range can be found in Appendix E.5.10.1  Linear Ramp of Velocity with RangeSuppose that a continuous-wave IF waveform has an instantaneous frequency  f(t) in Hertz(cycles/sec). Consider a range bin located at time tbin within a set of pulses that are separated byts+1ńPRF.  The phase measured at that bin on the nth pulse will be the integral of the frequencywithin that pulse starting from range zero (since the RVP8 is phase locked to range zero):Fn+ŕnts)tbinntsf(t)dtIf we assume that the input frequency is a linear Frequency Modulation (FM) at the rate of Mcycles/sec/sec on top of a base frequency To, then:Fn)1*Fn+ŕ(n)1)ts)tbin(n)1)ts(To)Mt)dt *ŕnts)tbinnts(To)Mt)dt +(Mts)tbinwhich, remarkably, is independent of both To and n.  Thus, a linear FM input signal produces afixed (I,Q) phase difference from pulse-to-pulse at any given range.  The magnitude of the phasedifference is proportional to the range, and the slope is (ĂMĂtsĂ) cycles for each second of delay inrange.  For example, if the test signal generator is sweeping 100KHz every two seconds, then thevelocity observed at a range of 300km at 250Hz PRF will be:Fn)1*Fn+ǒ100 KHz2 sec Ǔ ǒ1250 sec Ǔ (300 km ) ǒ6.6 msec1km Ǔ+0.40 cyclesWe would thus observe a velocity of (0.8  Vu) at 300km, where VuĂ is the unambiguousDoppler velocity in meters/sec.  Note that these phase difference calculations have made noassumptions about the RVP8 processing mode, and thus are valid in all major modes (PPP, FFT,DPRT, RPH), as well as in all Dual-PRF unfolding modes.Interestingly, this simple FM signal generator will also produce valid second trip velocities thatcan be seen during Random Phase processing.  This follows from the above analysis becausewe’ve never assumed that tbin was smaller than ts, i.e., it is fine for the range bin to be locatedin any higher-order trip.
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–765.10.2  Verifying PHIDP and KDPThe PHIDP and KDP processing algorithms can be tested using CW signal sources at IF.  In thealternating-transmitter single-receiver case, a single FM signal generator is modulated with anRVP8 polarization select line so that slightly different frequencies are generated for the H and Vpulses.  A maximum FM depth of several kilohertz is all that is required.  In the dual-receivercase, two (unmodulated) signal generators are used for each of the H and V intermediatefrequencies, and one or the other is detuned slightly from its correct center frequency.  In eithercase the frequency difference that produces a KDP value of 1.0 degree/km will be:(1.0 degreekm ) (1360cyclesdegree ) ( 299792 kmsecond )+833 cyclessecond5.10.3  Verifying RHOH, RHOV, and RHOHVThese three terms measure the normalized cross-channel covariance in a polarization radar.They all are computed in essentially the same way having the form:RHOAB +tsnAsnB*uts2Aut s2BuǸWhere the snA and snB are complex (I,Q) vectors from two receiver channels A and B, and “<>”denotes expected value.  This suggests that some form of amplitude modulation (AM) of theinput signal might be helpful.Suppose that the snA and snB samples are coming from two signal generators installed on adual-receiver system, and that only the B-Channel is AM modulated so that:|snA|+{SA,SA,SA,SA,SaAAA },|snB|+{SB,0,SB,0,SBAAA }Then the above estimator reduces to:RHOAB +(12)SASBS2A (12)S2BǸ++0.707A simple way to create these data is to set the A-Channel siggen for 95% AM depth, and use asinusoidal modulation source of, perhaps, 400Hz.  The reason for not choosing 100% depth isthat we would loose the Burst phase reference when the amplitude became smallest.  The 26dBreduction in SB is a close enough approximation to zero in the above formula.If we now observe the two receive channels with the RVP8 at a PRF of 800Hz, we will see thevarious RHOAB terms varying with range; reaching a high value of 1.00, and a low value of0.707.  The plots will be nearly stationary on the ascope screen because the PRF is almostprecisely twice the modulation rate (though they are free-running relative to each other).Adjusting the amplitude of either signal generator will not affect the ò terms, but it will have aninteresting effect on SQI.  If (T,Z,V,W) are being computed from both channels combined, thenthe SQI is:SQI +S2AS2A)(12)S2B
Processing Algorithms (draft)RVP8 User’s ManualApril 20035–77If we solve this equation for SQI=0.5 we find that the individual SA terms must have twice thepower of the individual SB terms.  This can be checked by adjusting either signal generator untilthe minimum plotted SQI is 0.5, and then verifying that the average H and V powers areidentical; or, equivalently, that ZDR, LDRH and LDRV are zero.The linear FM ramp described in Section 5.10.1 can also be used as a test of RHOAB in adual-receiver system.  With one siggen modulated and the other fixed, one receive channel willappear to be rotating relative to the other.  If the FM modulation is such that 1/N of a fullrevolution occurs per pulse at a given range, then if the sample size is N pulses we will observeRHOAB +0 at that range.  In fact, the plot of RHOAB will show a characteristic sin(x)ńx behavioras a function of range.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–16.  Host Computer CommandsThis chapter describes the digital commands that the host computer must use to set up andcontrol the RVP8 processor for recording data.  Each command is described in detailed in aseparate section of this chapter.  Note that a command mnemonic, or shorthand reference name,is given in each section heading.  These names are frequently used to refer to particularcommands.The write–up for each command includes a description of what the command does and apictorial layout of the bits in the 16-bit command word.  Commands consist of an initialcommand word containing an opcode in the low five bits.  If additional arguments are required,they are listed as “Input 1”, “Input 2”, etc.  Finally, if the command produces output, thosewords are listed as “Output 1”, “Output 2”, etc.  Often each word is broken down into severalindependent fields, each consisting of one or more bits.  In such cases, the pictorial layouts showthe placement of the bit fields within the word, and each field is described individually.  All datatransferred to or from the RVP8 are in the form of 16-bit words.Before attempting to program the RVP8, it is a good idea to at least skim through thedescriptions of every command.  The instruction set has been designed to be as concise andorthogonal as possible.  User programs should always execute the IOTEST command onpower-up to ensure that the interface connections are all intact.  The diagnostic result registersfrom GPARM should also be checked initially to verify that the RVP8 passed all internal checks.Since all internal RVP8 tables and parameters are set to reasonable values on power-up, it isconceivable that PROC commands could be issued immediately to acquire and process radardata.  More realistically, however, the default information is first modified to meet the usersneeds.To set up for data acquisition and processing the following sequence of commands might beexecuted.  Trigger and pulse width are first established using the SETPWF commands.  Rangebin placement and processor options are then chosen using LRMSK, and SOPRM, and receivernoise samples are taken with SNOISE.  The noise levels are not automatically sampled onpower-up, so SNOISE must be issued at least once by the user.  LFILT is executed if clutterfilters are needed.  If data rays are to be synchronized with antenna motion, then LSYNC is usedto specify a table of antenna angles.  After all setups are complete, PROC commands are issuedto actually collect, process, and output the data.  Errors detected during the execution ofcommands are noted by the RVP8 and can be monitored using GPARM.The RVP8 contains a 4096-word first-in-first-out (FIFO) buffer through which all output dataflow.  This buffer is included to simplify the requirements of the user’s interface hardware.  TheFIFO holds each sequential word generated by the RVP8 until such time as the user is ready toaccept it.  Thus, when reading from the processor, it is permissible to fall behind by as many as4096 words before any slowdown in performance occurs.  The RVP8 writes to the FIFO at fullspeed as long as it is not full, and the internal processing is not affected by the exact speed atwhich user I/O actually occurs.  This continues as long as the average I/O rate on, perhaps 10msintervals, matches the average rate at which data are being produced.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–2The sequence of events described above is altered when the FIFO becomes completely full.Then, when the processor generates the next output word, it waits in an idle loop until the usermakes room in the FIFO by reading out one or more words.  Until this space becomes available,the RVP8 simply waits and does not proceed any further with its internal processing.  This, ofcourse, leads to a slowdown in performance, but it is not a disastrous one.  The user alwaysobtains correct data no matter how long it takes to read it.  One could take advantage of this factto synchronize the acquisition of data by the RVP8 with the post-processing and display of thatdata by the user.  In this case, RVP8 would be instructed to output data at the maximum rate, theuser would read these words at the user’s maximum rate, and the overall system wouldautomatically run at the slower of those two speeds.When the output FIFO is full and the RVP8 has the next word ready for output, there is anotherway that the idle wait loop can be exited, that is, if the processor detects that the user isperforming a write I/O cycle.  Since the user should have been reading data by now, the presenceof a write cycle is taken to mean that some more important condition has arisen.  As such, thewait loop is terminated and the RVP8 accepts the write data soon afterward.  If the new data arecommands, they are executed right away, but any output they try to produce may be lost in asimilar manner.  The net effect is that the processor continues to execute all commands correctly,but that their output is discarded.The discarded output data are not in fact lost.   Rather, the data are eventually replaced with anequal number of zeros.  Each time the RVP8 discards an output word, it also increments aninternal 24-bit count.  When FIFO space becomes available in the future, the processor replacesall of the missing data with zero-valued placeholders.Writing when the FIFO is full can be particularly useful if the new command is a RESET whichcalls for clearing of the output FIFO.  When the RESET is processed, all past and present outputdata are discarded, leaving the RVP8 output section completely empty.  This is useful wheneverthe processor has pending output data which the user wants to truly throw away.6.1  No-Operation (NOP) This single-word instruction is simply ignored by the the Signal Processor.  The NOP is usefulwhen a number of words are to be flushed through the RVP8 with no side effects.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   0   0   0   0 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|6.2  Load Range Mask (LRMSK)This command informs the signal processor of the ranges at which data are to be collected.  Anarbitrary set of range bins are selected via an 8192-bit mask.  The Nth bit in the mask determineswhether data are acquired and processed at a range equal to RES x (N-1).  The Range resolutionis specified by a TTY setup question (see section 3.3.5), in the range 50 through 133 meters.Any collection of ranges may be chosen from integer multiples of that distance.  The examplebelow is given for the default resolution of 125 meters. The range mask is passed to the RVP8
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–3packed into 512 16-bit words.  The least significant bit of each packed word represents thenearest range, and the most significant bit represents the furthest range in each group of 16.Because of memory constraints, the RVP8 uses only the first 5600 bits in the mask.According to the range bins that are selected in the mask, the signal processor computes andstores internally a range normalization table which is later used to convert receiver intensitylevels into reflectivity levels in dBZ.  Note that the LRMSK command implicitly specifies thenumber of bins to be processed and output.  The maximum bin count is 2048, though dependingon the computational intensity of the configuration, the RVP8 may be able to compute fewerbins.  If the number of bins selected in the bit mask exceeds this maximum, the trailing bins aretruncated.  If the new mask does not specify any active bins, then a single bin at range zero isforced on.  The default power-up mask selects 256 bins equally spaced by 1.0km starting fromzero range.Range averaging is also determined by LRMSK.  The upper byte of the command controls howmany consecutive bins are grouped together.  A value of zero means no averaging;  one meansthat pairs of samples are averaged;  255 means that 256 terms are summed, etc.  The individualsamples that go into each average are still taken according to the bits that are set in the mask,except that they are now grouped together so that only one net bin results from the several datasamples.  Note that the limitation of 2048 sampled ranges applies to the bin count prior toaveraging.For example, suppose 100 bits are selected in the range mask and  no averaging is elected.  Thenparameters are computed at those 100 ranges, and 100 bins of data are output.  If the averagingwere set to one, rather than zero, samples would still be taken at the same ranges, but pairs ofbins would be averaged together and only 50 ranges would result.  Note that the parameters areaveraged by summing the autocorrelations for each bin.  The range normalization valueassociated with the averaged bin is computed according to the midpoint of the first and lastsample.Incompletely averaged bins are discarded by the LRMSK command.  In the above example, ifthe averaging were set to two so that triples of samples were summed, then only 33 bins wouldbe output.  This is because the 100-bit mask left a dangling 100th sample.  In the extreme casewhere there are not enough mask bits to result in even one complete bin, the RVP8 forces theaveraging to zero and turns on a single bin at zero range.When the RVP8 is operating in fast-switching dual-polarization mode (See SOPPRM Command,word #2), the maximum number of bins that can be processed is half the usual maximum.  Thisis because duplicate internal memory is needed to hold the states of the clutter filters separatelyfor each polarization.  If polarization switching is on and a range mask is loaded having morethan 1024 bins, then an error bit is set (GPARM Command, word 9) and only the first 1024 binsare used.  Conversely, if a range mask has already been loaded having more than 1024 bins andthe user attempts to enter the switching polarization mode, then that request is denied and theRVP8 continues to operate in its prior fixed polarization manner.  Whenever the number of rangebins is less than 1024, then none of the above interactions ever arises.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–4  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Range Avg. (See Text)     |           | 0   0   0   0   1 |  Command|_______________________________|_______|___|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||             Bits for ranges 0.000km to 1.875km                |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|  \_1.875                       .                             \_0.000                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          Bits for ranges 1022.000 km to 1023.875 km           |  Input 512|_______________________________________________________________|  \_1023.875                                                  \_1022.0006.3  Setup Operating Parameters (SOPRM)This command is used to configure the Signal Processor.  The command should be issuedwhenever any of the parameters in the list change.  The default parameter list consists of  twenty16-bit input words.  These can be followed by optional XARG parameters as needed.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   0   0   1   0 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                          Sample Size                          |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|The sample size is continually adjustable from 1 to 256 pulses.  However, during the alternatingpolarization mode, the sample size must be even.  If an odd value is entered it is rounded up byone in that case.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       | Polar |NHD|   |16B|CMS| R2|   |3x3|   |End|Lsr|Dsr|Rnv|  Input 2|_______|_______|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|Each of the single-bit fields selects whether the given processing or threshold option is enabled(1) or disabled (0).Polar Configures transmit polarization and Zdr processing:00 – Fixed polarization, Horizontal01 – Fixed polarization, Vertical10 – Alternating polarization pulse-to-pulse11 – Dual simultaneous transmissionNHD Disables inclusion of header words in the processed data that are output by thePROC command (See also, CFGHDR command).
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–516B Configures for 16-bit (rather than 8-bit) data output from the PROC command.This bit affects the single-parameter versions of Reflectivity, Velocity, Width, andZdr data.  However, the PROC command’s archive format always holds 8-bit data,regardless of the setting of 16B.  This gives the option of extracting both 8-bit and16-bit data simultaneously from each ray.CMS Enables Clutter Microsuppression, in which individual range bins are rejected(based on excessive clutter) prior to being averaged together in range.R2 Use three lag (R0/R1/R2) algorithms for width, signal power, and clutter correc-tion.3x3 Switches on the 3x3 output filter (See Section 5.3.3).  The RVP8 automaticallyhandles all of the pipelining overhead associated with running the 3x3 filter, i.e.,valid output data are always obtained in response to every PROC command.End Causes ENDRAY_ to pulse at the end of each ray.Lsr Reflectivity speckle remover.  When set, range speckles in the corrected and un-corrected reflectivity data are removed.Dsr Doppler speckle remover.  When set, range speckles in the velocity and width dataare removed.Rnv Range normalization of reflectivity data.  This bit also enables intervening gas at-tenuation correction.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                Log Slope    65536 * dB / (LSB)                |  Input 3|_______________________________________________________________|This number defines the multiplicative constant that converts the signal power in dB to the unitsof the 12–bit “Log of power in sample” time series outputs.  One fourth of this slope is used togenerate the “Log of Measured Noise Level” output from GPARM (word 6).  The recommendedvalue to use here is 0.03 (1966).  This gives a dynamic range of 122 dB in 12 bits.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                 LOG Threshold in 1/16 of dB                   |  Input 4|_______________________________________________________________|Reflectivity values below this level can result in thresholding of data, if the threshold controlflags (see below) include LOG Noise bits.  The threshold value is always non-negative, and thecomparison test is described in Section 5.3.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Clutter Correction (CCOR) Threshold in 1/16 of dB       |  Input 5|_______________________________________________________________|The clutter correction threshold is a bound on the computed log receiver adjustment for clutter.These corrections (in dB) are always negative.  Any clutter correction which is more negativethan the above value can result in thresholding of data.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                               |        SQI Threshold          |  Input 6|_______________________________|_______________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–6The Signal Quality Index (SQI) threshold is an unsigned binary fraction in the range 0 to255/256.  When the SQI for a range bin falls below the stated value it may result in thresholdingof data.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||         Weather Signal Power Threshold in 1/16 of dB          |  Input 7|_______________________________________________________________|Weather Signal Power (SIG) is an estimate of the SNR of the weather component of the receivedsignal.  When the SIG (see Section 5.2.10) falls below this comparison value it may result inthresholding of data.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||            Calibration Reflectivity in 1/16 of dB             |  Input 8|_______________________________________________________________|The calibration reflectivity is referenced to 1.0 kilometers.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               |    TopMode    |                               |  Input 9|_______________|_______________|_______________________________|The TopMode bits select the overall data acquisition and processing mode for the RVP8.Although the processing algorithms that are used in each top level mode are quite different, theRVP8 command set works in a uniform way in all modes.0000 Pulse Pair Processing Mode.  Doppler clutter filters are 4th-order IIR high pass;data are processed one pulse at a time as each pulse arrives (see Section 5.2.3).0001 FFT Processing Mode.  Doppler clutter filters use nonlinear frequency-domainapproach;  data are processed in batches of pulses (see Section 5.8).0010 Random Phase Processing Mode.  Data from first and second trips are dealiased inrange based on knowledge of the radar transmitter phase (see Section 5.9).0100 DPRT-1 Processing Mode.  The trigger generator produces alternate short and longpulses, and Doppler autocorrelations are computed using only the short pairs (seeSection 5.5).0101 DPRT-2 Processing Mode.  The trigger generator produces alternate short and longpulses, and Doppler autocorrelations are computed using both pairs (see Section5.5).  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||           |PCT|UVD|Window |ZER|  Filter Stabilization Delay   |  Input 10|___________|___|___|_______|___|_______________________________|The RVP8 clutter filters are controlled by this word.Delay This delay is introduced prior to processing the next ray of data whenever Dual-PRF velocity unfolding is enabled or the RVP8 has been reconfigured by usercommands.  The delay permits the clutter filter transients to settle down followingPRF and gain switches.  The value is specified as the number of pulses, and hence,the number of filter iterations, to wait.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–7ZER If set, then the clutter filter’s internal state variables are zeroed prior to waiting thedelay time.  For some signal conditions, this may give better results than allowingthe filter to naturally flow into the new data.Window Selects the type of window that is applied to time series data prior to computingpower spectra via a DFT.  Choices are:  0:Rectangular, 1:Hamming, 2:Blackman.UVD Unfold velocities using a simple (Vhigh – Vlow) algorithm, rather than the standardalgorithm described in Section 5.6.PCT If set, the RVP8 will attempt to run its standard processing algorithms even when acustom trigger pattern has been selected via the SETPWF command.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Threshold Control Flags for UnCorrected Reflectivity     |  Input 11|_______________________________________________________________|These flags select which threshold comparisons result in unCorrected reflectivity being acceptedor rejected at each bin.  There are four test comparisons that are made at each range, as describedabove for input words 4, 5, 6, and 7.  Each test either passes and produces a code of 1, 2, 4, and8 respectively, or fails and produces a code of zero.  The sum of the codes for each of the fourtests is a number between 0 and 15, which can also be interpreted as the following four-bitbinary number:  3   2   1   0  |   |   |   |   || 8 | 4 | 2 | 1 ||___|___|___|___|  \   \   \   \___ LOG Threshold Passes   \   \   \______ CCOR Threshold Passes    \   \_________ SQI Threshold Passes     \____________ SIG Threshold PassesThe individual bits of the Threshold Control Flag word each specify whether data are to beaccepted (1) or rejected (0) in each of the sixteen possible combinations of threshold outcomes.Thus, the pattern of bits in the flag word actually represents a truth table for a given logicalfunction of the four threshold outcomes.The following examples show actual values of the Flag word for the stated combinations ofacceptance criteria:Value CriteriaFFFF All Pass (Thresholds disabled)0000 All Fail (No data are passed)AAAA LOG8888 LOG and CSRA0A0 LOG and SQI8080 LOG and CSR and SQIF0F0 SQIFAFA SQI or LOGC0C0 SQI and CSRF000 SQI and SIGC000 SQI and SIG and CSRFFF0 SQI or SIGCCC0 (SQI or SIG) and CSR
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–8A simple way to generate these values is to imagine four 16-bit quantities having the followingnames and values: LOG=AAAA, CSR=CCCC, SQI=F0F0, SIG=FF00.  The flag value neededto represent a given logical combination of threshold outcomes is obtained as the result whenthat same logical combination is applied to these special numbers.For example:             (SQI or SIG) and CSR   =   (F0F0 or FF00 ) and CCCC                                    =   (FFF0) and CCCC                                    =    CCC0which corresponds with one of the examples given above.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Threshold Control Flags for Corrected Reflectivity      |  Input 12|_______________________________________________________________|See Description for Input #11.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||              Threshold Control Flags for Velocity             |  Input 13|_______________________________________________________________|See Description for Input #11.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                Threshold Control Flags for Width              |  Input 14|_______________________________________________________________|See Description for Input #11.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||           Bits to Invert in TAG Inputs 0 through 15           |  Input 15|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          Bits to Invert in TAG Inputs 16 through 31           |  Input 16|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||         Intervening Gas Attenuation Correction (dB/km)        |  Input 17|_______________________________________________________________|Gas attenuation correction attempts to compensate for overall (two-way) beam losses due toabsorption by atmospheric gasses.  The correction is linear with range, and is added to the dataalong with range normalization.  Therefore, clearing the RNV bit in Word #2 above disables thecorrection.  Of course, gas attenuation compensation can still be turned off even when RNV ison, simply by setting a slope of 0.0 dB/km.An attenuation of G db/km is encoded into the unsigned 16-bit word N as follows:0  N  10000 G = N / 100000      else G = 0.1 + (N – 10000)/10000
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–9This format is backward compatible with the previous linear format for all values between 0.0and 0.1dB/km; but it extends the upper range of values from 0.65535 up to 5.6535.  These largerattenuation corrections are needed for very short wavelength radars.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Threshold Control Flags for Differential Reflectivity  (Zdr) |  Input 18|_______________________________________________________________|See Description for Input #11.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||        Signed Zdr Calibration Offset in 1/16 dB   (GDR)       |  Input 19|_______________________________________________________________|When differential reflectivity is computed there is a possibility that radar asymmetries willintroduce a bias in the Zdr values, i.e., that Zdr will be non-zero even when observing purelyspherical targets.  This calibration offset permits nulling out this effect.  The GDR offsetaccounts for the overall Tx/Rx gain imbalance between the two channels of the radar.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          Radar Wavelength in Thousandths of Centimeters       |  Input 20|_______________________________________________________________|The radar wavelength is used in the calculation of 16-bit velocity and width data, to convertfrom Nyquist units to absolute physical units.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||        Signed LDR Calibration Offset in 1/100 dB  (XDR)       |  XARG 1|_______________________________________________________________|The XDR offset is used in the Linear Depolarization Ratio equations, and is the differentialreceiver gain between the two channels.  Note that unlike the GDR offset (used for ZDR), thegain difference does not depend on differential transmit power.The default (power-up) values for the above parameters are listed below.  Both the scientificunits and the integer-input required by the command to set up that value are given.  Most ofthese defaults will likely be reasonable for a wide variety of radars.Table 6–1: Default Values For Operating Parameters  Parameter Scientific Units InputSample Size 25 pulses 25Flag Word 0017 HexLog Slope 0.03 dB/LSB 1966LOG Threshold 0.5 dB 8CCOR Threshold –25.0 dB –400Signal Quality Index Threshold 0.5 (dimensionless) 128SIG Threshold 10.0 dB 160
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–10Table 6–1: Default Values For Operating Parameters (cont.)Parameter InputScientific UnitsCalibration Reflectivity –22.0 dBZ –352Gas Attenuation 0.016 dB/km 1600Zdr Offset (GDR) 0.0 dB 0LDR Offset (XDR) 0.0 dB 0AGC Integration Period 8 pulses 8Radar Wavelength 5.3 cm. 5300Dual PRF Filter Stabilization 10 pulses 10UnCor Refl. Thresh. Control Flag LOG AAAA HexCor Refl. Thresh. Control Flag LOG & CSR 8888 HexVelocity Thresh. Control Flag SQI & CSR C0C0 HexWidth Thresh. Control Flag SQI & CSR & SIG C000 HexZdr Refl. Thresh. Control Flag LOG AAAA HexTAG Bits to Invert No Inversions 0000 Hex6.4  Interface Input/Output Test  (IOTEST) This command is used to test both the input and output data busses of the signal processorinterface.  When issued, the command causes sixteen words to be read from the host controller,after which those same sixteen words are written back out.  Typically, the controller supplies a“barber pole” input sequence consisting, for example, of successive powers of two.  If all of theoutput words are correct, one may conclude that there are no malfunctioning bits in the interfacehardware.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   0   0   1   1 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–11  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Arbitrary Data Word  #1 Supplied by Host Controller      |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Arbitrary Data Word  #16 Supplied by Host Controller     |  Input 16|_______________________________________________________________|Note: The IOTEST command can also process and echo up to 128 additionalXARGS data words (See Section 6.20).  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Copy of Data Word #1 as supplied by Host Controller      |  Output 1|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Copy of Data Word #16 as supplied by Host Controller     |  Output 16|_______________________________________________________________|6.5  Interface Output Test  (OTEST) This command is used to test the integrity of the data being output by the signal processor.  Thecommand causes sixteen words to be output consisting of successive powers of two starting fromone.  By verifying whether each output word is correct, malfunctioning bits in the interface databus can easily be isolated.  This test is less stringent than the input/output test IOTEST, since theinput data paths to the processor are not being checked.  Typically, the OTEST is performed onlywhen the IOTEST fails, and then to determine whether the fault was on input or output.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   0   1   0   0 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   1 |  Output 1|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0 |  Output 16|_______________________________________________________________|6.6  Sample  Noise Level (SNOISE) This command is used to estimate the current noise level from the receiver, so that the noise canbe subtracted from subsequent measurements.  Data are sampled for 256 pulses at 256 bins,beginning at a selectable range and spaced by 0.125 meters.  The internal trigger generator is
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–12temporarily set to a special noise rate (usually much lower than the operating rate) during theprocess.  It is ultimately the user’s responsibility to insure that no returned power is presentwithin the 32km sampling interval.  In some cases it may be necessary to raise the antennaduring the noise measurement to avoid thermal noise pickup from the ground, or from weathertargets.SNOISE has the option of setting up a new sampling range and trigger generator rate each timeit is called.  Two bits in the command word determine which (if any) of the new values overridesthe current values stored in the RVP8.  The power-up sampling range is 250km (input value of250), and the power-up trigger rate is 200Hz (input value of 30000).  These initial values persistuntil such time as they are altered here.  Note that both input words must always be suppliedafter the command, even if the command calls for ignoring one or both of them.  The range issupplied directly in kilometers up to a maximum of 992km.  The trigger rate resulting from agiven input is 6MHz divided by the input value, i.e. the input value is the trigger period in0.1667 microsecond increments.  Keep in mind that the given rate is bounded against theminimum PRT allowed for the current radar pulse width.The SNOISE command bounds the requested starting range of the noise sampling interval.  Thisis to insure that the noise samples will fit within the specified PRT, and within the range maskhardware RAM.  The RVP8 sets an error bit when an improper range is requested.  The noisesampling procedure also bounds the PRF to 1250Hz before making its measurements.  Thisallows sufficient time for the algorithm to run properly on the 256 bins taken from 256 pulses.Note that the PRF bound is equally well imposed for external triggers too, i.e., external triggerswill be ignored for 800sec following each one that is actually used.The SNOISE command should be re-issued now and then to compensate for drift in the RF andA/D systems.  However, because DC offsets do not propagate into the “I” and “Q” values,reissuing the command is much less critical than with the RVP6.  SNOISE must be executed atleast once after power-up, before beginning to acquire and process data.  The RVP8 does notautomatically take a noise sample as part of its initialization procedure.The measured offsets are stored internally for all subsequent uses inside the RVP8.  The offsetvalues may be inspected via the GPARM command, as may the current range and rate valuesthemselves.  Of course, whenever the range or rate are changed the user must ensure that thenew trigger rate allows at least 32km following the new noise range.  If this requirement is notmet, or if other failures are detected during the noise measurement, appropriate bits are set in theGPARM latched status word.  This word should generally be checked after SNOISE to makesure that everything worked properly.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                       |Rat|Rng|           | 0   0   1   0   1 |  Command|_______________________|___|___|___________|___________________|Rng If 1, then the range in input word 1 is taken as the starting noise range for this andall subsequent SNOISE calls.Rat If 1, then the trigger rate in input word 2 is taken as the noise rate for this and allsubsequent SNOISE calls.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–13  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Starting Range in km (Max 992km) of 32km Sampling Interval   |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Internal Trigger Rate (6Mhz/N) to use During Noise Sampling   |  Input 2|_______________________________________________________________|6.7  Initiate Processing (PROC) The PROC command controls the actual processing and output of radar data.  The operatingmodes and types of data available from the RVP8 are described in detail in Chapter 1.  Thatsection also describes the proper use and application of the RVP8 to different radarenvironments.PROC is a single-word command that specifies the type of processing to be performed, and thetype of output to be generated.  The two mode bits in the command word select eitherSynchronous mode —  The processor acquires, processes, and outputs one ray in response toeach PROC command.  Processing is begun only after each command is actually received.Free running mode — A single PROC command is issued and rays are continually output asfast as they can be produced and consumed.  This continues until any other command iswritten, e.g., a NOP could be used to terminate the free running mode with no otherconsequences.Time Series mode — Always produced in a synchronous manner,  this mode require a newPROC command to initiate each new set of samples.  Data are output as 8-bit time series,16-bit time series, or 16-bit power spectra.Optional Dual-PRF velocity unfolding is chosen by command bits eight and nine.  For Dopplerdata either a 2:3, 3:4, or 4:5 PRF unfolding ratio may be selected.  The RVP8 carries out all ofthe unfolding steps internally, so that mean velocity is now output with respect to the largerunambiguous interval.  There is no additional velocity processing needed by the user, except ofcourse, to change the velocity scale on any displays being generated.  Furthermore, spectralwidths are scaled consistently with respect to the higher PRF, and require no user modificationbefore being plotted.When unfolding is selected, the internal trigger generator automatically switches rates onalternate rays.  The switch over occurs immediately after the last pulse of the current ray hasbeen acquired;  thus overlapping the internal post-processing and output time, with transmitterstabilization and data acquisition at the new rate.Output data are selected by the upper six bits of the PROC command.  Packed archive output isselected by setting the ARC bit.  Individual byte or word display output is selected by setting anyor all of the Z, T, V, W, Zdr, and KDP command word bits.  When more than one of these bits isset, the output array consists of all of the bins for the leftmost selected parameter, followed by allof the bins for the next selected parameter, etc.  Bits selected in XARG #1 behave the same way,except that the output order is right-to-left.  Both archive and display formats can be selected
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–14simultaneously, in which case the archive format is output first, followed by whicheverindividual display format values were also selected.  The archive format is not recommended foruse with new drivers because it can only handle four of the many possible output parametertypes.When time series mode is selected there are three output data formats available.  For backwardscompatibility, there is an 8-bit integer format in which the eight most significant bits from the I,Q, and LOG signals are represented in a byte.  This format is not recommended because it willgenerally miss weak signals. We recommend the floating-point format that uses 16-bits per A/Dsample.  There is also a 16-bit power spectrum output that is accurate to 0.01dB.  (See alsoGPARM output word #10).In addition to the above output data, the first words of each ray optionally contain additionalinformation about the ray itself.  These header words are configured by the CFGHDR opcode,and are included only if the NHD (No-Headers) bit in SOPRM Input #2 is clear.  For example, ifTAG angle headers are requested, if the ARC, Z and V bits are all set, and if there are 100 binsselected in the current range mask, then each RVP8 output ray consists of the following:1] TAG15 – TAG0    \  From Start of Acquisition2] TAG31 – TAG16   /          Interval3] TAG15 – TAG0    \  From End of Acquisition4] TAG31 – TAG16   /         Interval* 200 words of packed archive data,* 100 words of Corrected Reflectivity data in low byte only.* 100 words of Velocity data in low byte only,The Command word format for Synchronous Doppler Mode is:  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||ARC| Z | T | V | W |ZDR|Unfold |KDP| 0   1 | 0   0   1   1   0 |  Command|___|___|___|___|___|___|_______|___|_______|___________________|The Command word format for Free Running Doppler Mode is:  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||ARC| Z | T | V | W |ZDR|Unfold |KDP| 1   0 | 0   0   1   1   0 |  Command|___|___|___|___|___|___|_______|___|_______|___________________|Either of these may be augmented by an optional XARG word (See Section 6.20)  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   | (Tx Vert) | (Tx Horz) |   |   |   ||                       |Flg|Phi Rho Ldr|Phi Rho Ldr|SQI|RHV|PDP|  XARG 1|_______________________|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|___|Unfold Selects Dual–PRF unfolding scheme:00 : No Unfolding 01 : Ratio of 2:310 : Ratio of 3:4 11 : Ratio of 4:5ARC Selects archive output format in which four data bytes (see 8-Bit descriptions be-low) are packed into two output words per bin as follows:
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–15  High Byte    Low Byte |           |           ||     V     |     Z     |  First Word|___________|___________| _______________________ |           |           ||     W     |     T     |  Second Word|___________|___________|The remaining data parameters are available in both 8-Bit and 16-bit formats, according toSOPRM Command input word #2 (See Section 6.3).  The same SOPRM word configures theRVP8 for Single or Dual polarization.  The later is required for KDP, PDP, and RHV to becomputed properly.V Selects radial velocity data.8-Bit Velocity Format — Mean velocity, expressed as a fraction of the unambig-uous velocity interval, is computed from the unsigned byte N as:Vm/sec = VNyquist  x  (N–128) / 127.50 : Indicates velocity data is not available at this range1 : Maximum velocity towards the radar128 : Zero velocity255 : Maximum velocity away from the radarWhen velocity unfolding is selected, the output is still interpreted as above, ex-cept that the unambiguous interval is increased by factors of  2, 3, and 4 for for2:3, 3:4, and 4:5 unfolding.16-Bit Velocity Format — Mean velocity in meters/second is computed from theunsigned word N as:Vm/sec = (N–32768) / 100The overall range is from –327.67m/sec to +327.66m/sec in one centimeter/sec-ond steps as follows:0 : Indicates velocity data is not available at this range1 : –327.67 m/sec (towards the radar)32768 : 0.00 m/sec65534 : +327.66 m/sec (away from the radar)65535 : Reserved CodeW Selects spectral width data.8-Bit Width Format —Spectral width is computed from the unsigned byte N as:WNyquist = N / 256The overall range is a fraction between 1/256 to 255/256 of the unambiguous in-terval. The code of zero indicates that width data was not available at this range.16-Bit Width Format — Spectral width in meters/second is computed from theunsigned word N as:Wm/sec =  N / 100
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–16The overall range is from 0.01m/sec to 655.34m/sec in one centimeter/secondsteps as follows:0 : Indicates width data is not available at this range1 : 0.01 m/sec65534 : 655.34 m/sec65535 : Reserved CodeZ Selects clutter corrected reflectivity data.8-Bit deciBel Format — The level in decibels is computed from the unsignedbyte N as:dBZ = (N–64)/2.The overall range is therefore from –31.5 dBZ to +95.5 dBZ in half-dB steps asfollows:0 : Indicates no reflectivity data available at this range1 : –31.5 dBZ64 : 0.0 dBZ128 : 32.0 dBZ255 : +95.5 dBZ16-Bit deciBel Format — The level in decibels is computed from the unsignedword N as:dBZ = (N–32768) / 100The overall range is from –327.67dB to +327.66dB in 1/100dB steps as follows:0 : Indicates no reflectivity data available at this range1 : –327.67 dBZ32768 : 0.00 dBZ65534 : +327.66 dBZ65535 : Reserved CodeT Selects total reflectivity.  Same 8-bit and 16-bit coding formats as for clutter cor-rected reflectivity above.ZDR Selects differential reflectivity data.8-Bit ZDR Format — The level in decibels is computed from the unsigned byteN as:dB = (N–128) / 16The overall range is from –7.935dB to +7.935dB in one-sixteenth dB steps as fol-lows:0 : Indicates no reflectivity data available at this range1 : –7.9375 dB128 : 0.0000 dB255 : +7.9375 dB
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–1716-Bit ZDR Format — Same as 16-bit deciBel format.KDP Selects dual polarization specific differential phase data.8-Bit KDP Format — Values are coded into an unsigned byte using a logarith-mic scale.  The KDP angles are multiplied by the wavelength in cm. (to reducedynamic range) and then converted to a log scale separately for both signs. Theminimum value is 0.25 deg*cm/km, and the maximum value is 150.0 deg*cm/km.  A code of zero represents no data, and a code of 128 represents 0 deg*cm/km.  The conversion equation for positive values (codes from 129 to 255) is:KDP 0.25 600N129126 The conversion equation for negative values (codes from 1 to 127) is:KDP –0.25 600127N126 16-Bit KDP Format — Same as 16-bit deciBel format, except that the units arehundredths of degrees per kilometer.  No weighting by wavelength is introduced.PDP Selects dual polarization differential phase DP data.8-Bit DP Format — The phase angle in degrees is computed on a 180-degreeinterval from the unsigned byte N as:DP(mod180) = 180 (N – 1) / 2540 : Indicates no DP data available at this range1 : 0.00 deg254 : 179.29 deg255 : Reserved Code16-Bit DP Format — The phase angle in degrees is computed on a 360-degreeinterval from the unsigned word N as:DP(mod360) = 360 (N – 1) / 655340 : Indicates no DP data available at this range1 : 0.000 deg65534 : 359.995 deg65535 : Reserved CodeRHV Selects dual polarization correlation coefficient HV data.8-Bit  HV Format — The correlation coefficient is computed on the interval 0.0to 1.0 using a square root weighting of the unsigned byte N as:HV(N1)2530 : Indicates no  HV data available at this range1 : 0.0000 (dimensionless)2 : 0.0629253 : 0.9980
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–18254 : 1.0000255 : Reserved Code16-Bit  HV Format — The correlation coefficient is computed on the interval 0.0to 1.0 linearly from the unsigned word N as:HV = (N – 1) / 655330 : Indicates no  HV data available at this range1 : 0.0 (dimensionless)65534 : 1.065535 : Reserved CodeSQI Selects Signal Quality Index data.  This dimensionless parameter uses the same8-bit and 16-bit data formats as RHV ( HV).LDR Selects Linear Depolarization Ratio, measured either on the horizontal receivechannel while transmitting vertically, or on the vertical receive channel whiletransmitting horizontally.8-Bit LDR Format — The level in decibels is computed from the unsigned byteN as:dB = –45.0  +  (N–1) / 5This spans an asymmetric interval around zero decibels, and allows for crosschannel isolation as large as 45dB.  The overall range is from –45.0dB to +5.6dBin 0.2dB steps as follows:0 : Indicates no LDR data available at this range1 : –45.0 dB226 : 0.0 dB254 : +5.6 dB255 : Reserved Code16-Bit LDR Format — Same as 16-bit deciBel format.RHO Selects the cross channel correlation coefficient.  This dimensionless parameteruses the same 8-bit and 16-bit data formats as RHV ( HV).PHI Selects the cross channel differential phase.  This parameter uses the same 8-bitand 16-bit angular data formats as PDP (DP).Flg Selects flag word output, bits defined as follows:0 Range unfolding error1 LOG threshold passed2 CCOR threshold passed3 SQI threshold passed4 SIG threshold passed5 Bin was speckle filtered
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–19The Command word format for Time Series Mode is:  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || TSOUT |   Spec Type   |Unfold |   | 1   1 | 0   0   1   1   0 |  Command|_______|_______________|_______|___|_______|___________________|TSOUT Selects type of data to be output.00 : 8-bit Time Series 01 : Power Spectrum10 : 16-bit Time Series 11 : UnusedWhen the TSOUT bits select “Power Spectrum” then, depending on the current major mode, afurther choice may be needed to select one of several spectral view points.  For the RandomPhase major mode the possible values of “Spec Type” are:0: Raw First Trip 4: Raw Second Trip1: Whitened First Trip 5: Whitened Second Trip2: Cleaned First Trip 6: Cleaned Second Trip3: Final First Trip 7: Final Second TripWhen time series output is selected the output data consist either of (3xBxN) or (2xBxN) words,depending on the output format, where B is the number of bins in the current range mask, and Nis the number of pulses per ray.  Data samples for each bin of pulse #1 are output first, followedby those for each bin of pulse #2, etc.  up to pulse #N.  In other words, the data are output in thesame time-order that they were acquired.In the floating point format, three words are used for each bin:  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Exponent     | S |               Mantissa                |   (I)|___________________|___|_______________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Exponent     | S |               Mantissa                |   (Q)|___________________|___|_______________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 0   0   0   0 |             Log of Power in Sample            |  (LOG)|_______________|_______________________________________________|To convert the floating I and Q samples to voltages: First create a 12-bit signed integer in whichbits zero through 9 are copied from the Mantissa field, and bits ten and eleven are either 01 or 10depending on whether S is 0 or 1.  Then, multiply this number by 2**(exponent–40), where theexponent field is interpreted as an unsigned 5-bit integer.  Finally multiply by the maximumvoltage.  The resulting value has 12-bits of precision and a dynamic range of approximately190dB.  The large dynamic range is necessary to cover the full range of data.  In summary:Voltage VMAX (Sign,Mantissa)2Exponent40Note that the resulting voltage span is actually 4VMAX.  The extra factor of four is built intothe format so that transient excursions above the full scale input voltage can still be encodedproperly.  These may arise for time series data that have been processed by an IIR clutter filter.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–20The “Log of Power in Sample” is provided mainly for backwards compatibility.  It can becalculated from the I and Q numbers.  To convert to dBm it requires a slope and offset asfollows:dBm PMAX Slope [Value 3584]Where:PMAX  = +4.5dBm for 12-bit IFD, +6.0dBm for 14-bit IFDVMAX  = 0.5309 Volts for 12-bit IFD, 0.6310 Volts for 14-bit IFDSlope = “Log Power Slope” word 3 of SOPRM command.  0.03 recommended.For backwards compatibility the RVP8 produces a 8-bit fixed point time series format.  Becauseof the limited dynamic range available, this will only show strong signals, and is notrecommended for use.  The I, Q, and Log power triplets are packed into two 16-bit output wordsas follows:  High Byte    Low Byte |           |           || Q Sample  | I Sample  |  First Word|___________|___________|                         |           |           | |   Zero    | Log Power |  Second Word|___________|___________|The “Log Power” value is the upper 8 bits of the long format.  The other numbers are producedby the equation:Voltage VMAX Sample128 When Power Spectrum output is selected, the spectrum size is chosen as the largest power of two(N2) that is less than or equal to the current sample size (N).  When the sample size is not apower of two, a smaller spectrum is computed that by averaging the spectra from the first N2and the last N2 points. The data format is one word/bin/pulse, in the same order as for timeseries output.  Each word gives the spectral power in hundredths of dB, with zero representingthe level that would result from the strongest possible input signal.  Thus, the spectral outputterms are almost always negative.The time series that are output by the RVP8 are the filtered versions of the raw data, whenavailable.  If a non-zero time-domain clutter filter is selected at a bin, then the I and Q data forthat bin show the effects of the filter.  Whenever you need to observe the raw samples, make surethat no clutter filters are being applied.In pulse pair time series mode with dual receivers, selecting (H+V) will produce data in one oftwo formats according to the “Sum H+V Time Series” question in the Mp setup section:Answering “Yes” will result in summed time series from both channels, butspectra from the DSP will be the averaged spectra from each channelindividually.  This allows the IRIS ascope utility to display either the
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–21spectrum-of-sum or sum-of-spectra according to whether the “Spectra from DSP”button is pressed in the Processing/Gen-Setup window.Answering “No” will still produce the usual (BxN) time series output samples,except that the first half of these samples will be the first half of the “H” data intheir normal order.  This will be followed by a zero sample if (BxN) is odd;followed by the first half of the “V” data, also in their normal order.In other words, only the first halves of the individual “H” and “V” sample arraysare output by the RVP8.  As an example, if you select 25 bins and 100 pulses,then the output data will consist of 1250 “H” samples (from all bins in the first 50pulses), followed by 1250 “V” samples from the exact same set of bins andpulses.  This is the more useful option when custom algorithms are being run onthe data from the two separate receivers.When the number of output words is large there is a possibility that the internal buffering withinthe RVP8 may overflow and data may be lost.  Due to internal memory limitations, the product(BxN) must be less than 12000.  A bit in the latched status word (See GPARM) indicates whentime series overflows occur.  In such cases, the correct number of words are still output, but theyare all zero after the point at which overflow was detected.6.8  Load Clutter Filter Flags (LFILT) A special feature of the RVP8 processor is that any of the eight available clutter filters may bechosen independently at each selected range.  This range-dependent clutter removal is usefulwhen the clutter characteristics vary with increasing range.  Typically, clutter interference ismost severe in the immediate vicinity of the radar.  Thus, a highly rejective filter might bechosen for near ranges, and a less rejective or perhaps no filter could be used at far ranges.The input words following the LFILT command specify the choice of filter to be applied at eachof the (up to 2048) selected range bins.  A fixed size filter table is always loaded, regardless ofwhether the range mask (See LRMSK) is using the full number of bins.  In such cases, the laterfilter codes are simply be ignored for the current range mask.  However, if a longer range maskis loaded in the future, then those later codes would apply to the appropriately numbered bins.Put another way, each filter code is associated with a particular bin number, not with a particularrange.  The correspondence between bin numbers and actual ranges is made only through therange mask.Only the low three bits are used in each word to specify the filter number.  The correspondencebetween filter codes and filter characteristics is given in Appendix C.  If the ALL bit is set in theCommand, then 2048 words are loaded, corresponding to the maximum number of range binsthat are allowed.  Otherwise only 512 words are loaded, and the 512th filter choice is replicatedfor all bins further in range.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                       |ALL| 0   1   0   0   0 |  Command|_______________________________________|___|___________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–22  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                                   |   IQ #1   |  Input 1|___________________________________________________|___________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                                   | IQ  #512  |  Input 512|___________________________________________________|___________|6.9  Get Processor Parameters (GPARM) This command is used to access status information from the RVP8 processor.  Sixty-four wordsare always transferred, some later words are reserved for future compatibility and are read aszeros.  For convenience, a shorthand table of the output words is given in Table 6–2.Table 6–2: RVP8 Status Output Words  Word Description Word Description1Revision / Serial number 33 LOG Threshold2 Number of Range Bins 34 CCOR Threshold3 Current trigger period 35 SQI threshold4 Current TAG00 – TAG15 36 SIG Threshold for Width5 Current TAG16 – TAG31 37 Calibration Reflectivity6 Log of Measured Noise Level 38 — Reserved —7 “I” Channel DC Offset 39 — Reserved —8 “Q” Channel DC Offset 40 Range Averaging Choice9 Latched Processor Status 41 — Reserved —10 Immediate Status Word #1 42 — Reserved —11 Diagnostic Register A 43 Header configuration of PROC data12 Diagnostic Register B 44 I-Squared Noise (Low 16-bits)13 Number of Pulses / Ray 45 I-Squared Noise (High 16-bits)14 Trigger count (Low 16-bits) 46 Q-Squared Noise (Low 16-bits)15 Trigger Count (High 8-bits) 47 Q-Squared Noise (High 16-bits)16 No. of Properly Acquired Bins 48 Log of Measured Noise Level17 No. of Properly Processed Bins 49 LOG-Exponential Noise Std. Dev.18 Immediate Status Word #2 50 Horizontal/Vertical Noise Ratio19 Noise Range in Km 51 AFC/MFC Control Value20 Noise Trigger Period 52 Interference Filter Select21 Pulse Width 0 min. Trig. Period 53 Interference Filter C1 Constant22 Pulse Width 1 min. Trig. Period 54 Interference Filter C2 Constant
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–23Table 6–2: RVP8 Status Output Words (cont.)Word DescriptionWordDescription23 Pulse Width 2 min. Trig. Period 55 Immediate Status Word #324 Pulse Width 3 min. Trig. Period 56 Burst Tracking Slew25 Pulse Width Bit Patterns 57 Polarization Algorithm Choices26 Current /Pulse Width 58 — Reserved —27 Current Trigger Gen. Period 59 — Reserved —28 Desired Trigger Gen. Period 60 — Reserved —29 PRT at Start of Last Ray 61 — Reserved —30 PRT at End of Last Ray 62 — Reserved —31 Processing/Threshold Flags 63 — Reserved —32 Log Slope 64 — Reserved —  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   1   0   0   1 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Rev Bits 3–0 |  Rev 6–4  |           Serial Number           |  Output 1|_______________|___________|___________________________________|The revision and serial numbers of the particular RVP8 board are accessible here.  Thisinformation is useful when computer software is being designed to handle a variety of signalprocessor revisions.  The revision number is seven bits total; four of which are still in the highfour bits of the word for compatibility with an older format.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||        Number of Bins Currently Selected in Range Mask        |  Output 2|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  TRIGIN Current Trigger Period in 1/8km (0.83333 usec) Steps  |  Output 3|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                Current Sample of TAG bits 15–0                |  Output 4|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                Current Sample of TAG bits 31–16               |  Output 5|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 0   0 | (MSB)       Log of Measured Noise Level         (LSB) |  Output 6|_______|_______________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–24This value is scaled 4 times higher than the time series format.  See the discussion in Section 6.7.To convert to dBm, use the equation:dBm PMAX Slope (Value4) 3584  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || (MSB (Sign))      ”I” Channel Measured DC Offset        (LSB) |  Output 7|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || (MSB (Sign))      ”Q” Channel Measured DC Offset        (LSB) |  Output 8|_______________________________________________________________|The “I” and “Q” values are stored in a linear format, similar to the short form time series.  Seethe discussion in Section 6.7.  These numbers should always be very close to zero, because theFIR filter that creates them is designed to reject DC.  To convert to voltage, use the equation:Voltage VMAX Value32767  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Latched Status Word (Bits Cleared After Each Access)     |  Output 9|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 No Trigger during noise measurement.Bit 1 Trigger too fast during noise measurement, i.e., some of the noise sample binswere positioned past the trigger range.Bit 2 No trigger during PROC command.Bit 3 PRF varied by more than 10 microseconds from the beginning to the end of aprocessing interval.Bit 5 FIFO overflow during last PROC command.Bit 6 Command received while waiting for output FIFO space.  The command was pro-cessed but some output data has been lost (zeroed).Bit 7 Error detected during last SNOISE command.Bit 9 Error in last Load Range Mask (LRMSK) Command.  This generally means thattoo many range bins were selected.Bit 10 Error in LSIMUL command protocol.Bit 11 Measured phase sequence is incorrect.Bit 15 Invalid processor configuration.  This bit is set if the last PROC command calledfor an illegal combination of parameters.  The possible causes are:   Spectrum size greater than 128 or less than 4   More than 342 bins/slave in FFT modes   (bins/slave) x (4 + sample size) exceeds 26200 in FFT modes   (bins/slave) x (sample size) exceeds 3000 for Time Series or Spectra output   Odd number of bins selected during fast polarization switching   Bad combination of polarization parameters
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–25  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Immediate Status Word #1 (Current State of Affairs)       |  Output 10|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 No trigger, or, more than 50ms. since last trigger.Bit 1 Error in loading trigger angle table (See LSYNC Command).Bit 2 PWINFO command is disabled.Bit 3 Angle sync input is BCD (Else binary angle).Bit 4 Angle sync is on elevation axis (Else azimuth axis).Bit 5 Angle sync is enabled.Bit 6 Angle sync is not interruptible.Bit 7 Angle sync is dynamic (else rays begin on sync angles).Bit 8 DSP has full IAGC hardware and firmware configuration.Bit 9 DSP supports 16-bit floating time series.Bits 11,10  Current unfolding mode.Bits 13,12 Number of AUX boards attached.Bit 14 DSP supports Power Spectrum output  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                 Diagnostic Result Register  A                 |  Output 11|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 RVP8/Rx card #1 failureBit 1 RVP8/Rx card #2 failureBit 2 RVP8/Tx card #1 failureBit 3 RVP8/Tx card #2 failureBit 4 IO62 card #1 failureBit 5 IO62 card #2 failureBit 6 Error loading config/setup filesBit 7 Error attaching to antenna libraryBit 8 Problem when forking compute processes  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                 Diagnostic Result Register  B                 |  Output 12|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||              Number of Pulses Being Integrated                |  Output 13|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                Trigger Count (Low 16-bits)                    |  Output 14|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                               |  Trigger Count (high 8-bits)  |  Output 15|_______________________________|_______________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–26The trigger count is a running tally of the number of triggers received by the RVP8 on theTRIGIN line.  It is a full 24-bit counter.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Number of Properly Acquired Bins for Current Range Mask & PRT |  Output 16|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  No. of Valid Bins in Initial Part of Ray From Last PROC Cmd  |  Output 17|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Immediate Status Word #2 (Current State of Affairs)      |  Output 18|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 Processor supports FFT algorithmsBit 1 Processor supports Random Phase algorithmsBit 3 Processor supports DPRT (Dual-PRT) algorithmsBit 4 Problem in UpLink COAX cable from RVP8/Main ––> RVP8/IFDBit 5 Problem in DownLink fiber cable from RVP8/IFD ––> RVP8/MainBit 7 IFD PLL is not locked to external user-supplied clock referenceBits 8–10 Status of burst pulse and AFC feedback    1: AFC Disabled 2: Manual Frequency Control    3: No burst pulse detected 4: AFC is waiting for warm-up    5: AFC is locked 6: AFC is trackingBit 11 IFD test switches are not in their normal operating positionBit 12 Set according to whether the RVP8 is performing trigger blanking.  This allowsthe host computer to decide whether to interpret the End-TAG-0 bit in the outputray header as a blanking flag, or as a normal TAG line.Bit 13 Missing signal at IFD Burst InputBit 14 Slave DSP count may be less than the number of available chipsBit 15 Set when valid burst power is detected but the center-of-mass lies outside of theaperture sub-window that defines the portion of the pulse used for AFC analysis.This error bit effectively flags when the burst pulse has drifted out of its optimalplacement within the sampling window.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||   Starting Range in Km at Which Noise Sample Data are Taken   |  Output 19|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Trigger Period (0.16667usec Increments) During Noise Sampling |  Output 20|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–27  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 0   |  Output 21|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 1   |  Output 22|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 2   |  Output 23|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 3   |  Output 24|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Four 4-bit Control Bit Patterns for Each Pulse Width      |  Output 25|_______________________________________________________________|See PWINFO command, input word #1, for definition of these bits.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                       |Window |    TopMode    |       |  P.W. |  Output 26|_______________________|_______|_______________|_______|_______|P.W. Currently selected radar pulse widthTopMode Major Mode (See SOPRM Input #9)Window Spectral Window Choice (See SOPRM Input #10)  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||    Current Trigger Generator Period (0.16667usec Increments)  |  Output 27|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||    Desired Trigger Generator Period (0.16667usec Increments)  |  Output 28|_______________________________________________________________|The desired trigger generator rate is that which was selected in the most recently issuedSETPWF command (or power-up rate if SETPWF was never issued).  The current rate may bedifferent from the desired rate due to bounding against limits for the current pulse width, orbeing in an odd ray cycle during dual-PRT processing.  The measured PRT’s  are forced to0xFFFF (the maximum unsigned value) whenever the external trigger is expected but missing.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     TRIGIN Period at Start of Last PROC Acquisition Time      |  Output 29|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      TRIGIN Period at End of Last PROC Acquisition Time       |  Output 30|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–28The PRTs from the start and end of the last ray are the actual measured values wheneverpossible, i.e., when non-simulated data are being processed, and we either have an externaltrigger, or an internal trigger that is not in any of the Dual-PRT modes.  The units are the sameas for the measured current trigger period in Output #3.Outputs 31 through 37 are the current processing and threshold parameters set by SOPRM.  SeeSection 6.3 for additional notes on each of these parameters.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       | Polar |NHD|   |16B|CMS| R2|           |End|Lsr|Dsr|Rnv|  Output 31|_______|_______|___|___|___|___|___|___________|___|___|___|___|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                      Log Slope    65536 * dB / LSB            |  Output 32|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               LOG Noise Threshold in 1/16 of dB               |  Output 33|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Clutter Correction (CCOR) Threshold in 1/16 of dB       |  Output 34|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                               |        SQI Threshold          |  Output 35|_______________________________|_______________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                SIG Threshold in 1/16 of dB                    |  Output 36|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||            Calibration Reflectivity in 1/16 of dB             |  Output 37|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 38|_______________________________|_______________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 39|_______________________________|_______________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                               | Range Avg (From LRMSK Command)|  Output 40|_______________________________|_______________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 41|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–29  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 42|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Header Configuration of PROC data (Copy of CFGHDR Input #1)  |  Output 43|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Noise Sum of I Squared     MSB=2**–16   LSB=2**–31        |  Output 44|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Noise Sum of I Squared     MSB=1   LSB=2**–15            |  Output 45|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Noise Sum of Q Squared     MSB=2**–16   LSB=2**–31        |  Output 46|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Noise Sum of Q Squared     MSB=1   LSB=2**–15            |  Output 47|_______________________________________________________________|To compute the noise power in dBm from Words 44-47, first calculate:NI(Word 45) 215 (Word 44) 231NQ(Word 47) 215 (Word 46) 231From which we obtain:dBm PMAX 10 log10 NINQ3dBNote that the four integer values become rather small and severely quantized when the noisepower drops to low values.  Historically, these four words were used to balance the individualgain of the “I” and “Q” channels in the RVP6 in the presence of a strong test signal.  Since “I”and “Q” are inherently balanced in the RVP8, these output words are no longer of much value.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          Log of Measured Noise Level (same as word 6)         |  Output 48|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Exponential-LOG Noise Standard Deviation (8000hex)        |  Output 49|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Ratio of Horizontal/Vertical Noise Power in Hundredths of dB |  Output 50|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||         16–Bit AFC/MFC Value (–32768 through +32767)          |  Output 51|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–30  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | IFD Sat.Power |    MinRev     |    Inter.F    |  Output 52|_______________|_______________|_______________|_______________|Inter.F Specifies which interference filter is running.  Zero means “none”; see Section5.1.4 for a description of the interference filter algorithms.MinRev Minor revision level of the RVP8 code that is currently running.IFD Sat.Power (PMAX )Input power required to saturate the IF-Input A/D converter for the RVP8/IFD re-ceiver that is currently attached.0: +4.5dBm 1: +6.0dBm  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Interference Filter Parameter “C1” in Hundredths of deciBels  |  Output 53|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Interference Filter Parameter “C2” in Hundredths of deciBels  |  Output 54|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Immediate Status Word #3 (Current State of Affairs)      |  Output 55|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 Burst pulse timing adjustments can be madeBit 1 Burst pulse frequency adjustments can be madeBit 2 Burst pulse hunting is enabledBit 3 Burst pulse hunt is running right nowBit 4 Last burst pulse hunt was unsuccessfulBit 5 Dual PRT Type 2 is supportedBit 6 Could not generate the requested phase sequenceBit 7 Problem with digital transmitter clockBits 8-11 User-defined Major Modes 1-4 are supported  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Signed trigger slew in hundredths of microseconds       |  Output 56|_______________________________________________________________|This is the same format that is used by the SETSLEW command to set the current trigger slew(See Section 6.24)  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                  Polarization Algorithm Choices               |  Output 57|_______________________________________________________________|Bit 0 Use H transmissions for (T,Z,V,W)Bit 1 Use V transmissions for (T,Z,V,W)Bit 2 Use Co–Pol reception for (T,Z,V,W)
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–31Bit 3 Use Cross–Pol reception for (T,Z,V,W)Bit 4 Correct all polar params for noiseBit 5 Use filtered data for all polar paramsBit 6 Sign convention for PHIdp  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 58|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                        Reserved (Zero)                        |  Output 64|_______________________________________________________________|6.10  Load Simulated Time Series Data (LSIMUL)This command is provided as a diagnostic for proper functioning of the RVP8 algorithms.  Itpermits arbitrary simulated data samples to be input to the processing routines, rather thansampled data from the A/D converters as is ordinarily the case.  Since the properties of thesimulated data are known exactly, it is possible to verify that the calculations within the RVP8are proceeding correctly.The LSIMUL command (with operation=1) should be issued prior to the PROC command whichis being tested.  This enables the simulated data mode.  The next PROC command will then waitfor N (N = sample size) LSIMUL commands (with operation=2) prior to outputting each ray.The arrival of any other command during that time will cause the simulated data mode to beexited, and error bit #10 will be set in the GPARM latched status word.  The error bit is also setif an LSIMUL command with operation=2 is received while simulated data mode is disabled.You may specify a single simulated data sample for every range bin, or a pattern or simulatedsamples to be replicated over the range of bins.  Most RVP8 algorithms are independent ofrange, and can be tested with identical data at every bin.  Notable exceptions, however, are the“pop” clutter filter, and range bin averaging procedures.  In its full generality, the LSIMULcommand permits independent I and Q samples to be simulated at every bin of every pulse.  Ifthis results in more host computer I/O than is practical, then specify fewer simulated bins andallow the RVP8 to replicate them internally.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                   | Operation |           | 0   1   0   1   0 |  Command|___________________|___________|___________|___________________|The available operations are:0 Disable the use of simulated data.  RVP8 returns to acquisition and processing oflive data from the A/D converters.1 Enable processing of simulated data.  Subsequent PROC commands will use thedata supplied in the next N (N = sample size) LSIMUL commands with Opera-tion=2.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–32The receiver noise and offset levels which are internally maintained by the RVP8are zeroed by this command.  This is because the measured offsets are not relevantto the simulated data, and must not be used in the subsequent computations.  Thus,it is important to issue the SNOISE command before resuming the acquisition andprocessing of live radar data.2 Load one pulse of data samples.  Each bin within the pulse is represented by four16-bit words which represent a single instantaneous sample.  You may specify oneor more bins to be loaded; the RVP8 will replicate these data as necessary in orderto fill out the entire count of acquired bins.  Thus, the total number of wordsloaded is (4+4B), where B is the bin count specified in Word #1.  This takes ac-count of the four “header” words, plus four words for every bin being defined.  IfB is zero, then a zero-valued sample is applied for all channels.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          Number of Bins of Simulated Data Which Follow        |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Transmit Phase of This Pulse (16-bit Binary Angle)      |  Input 2|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Transmit Power in Hundredths of dB (Zero dB Nominal)     |  Input 3|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                            Reserved                           |  Input 4|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                            Reserved                           |  Input 5|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||              Signed “I” A/D Sample  (F16.12 Format)           |  Input 6|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||              Signed “Q” A/D Sample  (F16.12 Format)           |  Input 7|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                            Reserved                           |  Input 8|_______________________________________________________________|...
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–336.11  Reset (RESET) The RESET command permits resetting either the entire RVP8 processor, or selected portionsthereof.  Flags within the command word determine the action to be taken.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                       |Nv |Nse|Fif|Nv |Nv | 0   1   1   0   0 |  Command|_______________________|___|___|___|___|___|___________________|Nv Reloads configuration from the saved nonvolatile settings.  For compatibility withRPV6 and RVP7, any of 3 bits will trigger this response.Nse Reset the receiver noise levels to the power-up default value for all pulsewidths asdefined in the Mt setup questions (See Section 3.3.5).Fif Remove any data currently in the output FIFO’s.  This permits flushing outputdata that was left from a previous command, so that new output can be read fromscratch.  See notes in the Introduction to this chapter concerning actions taken bythe RVP8 when the output FIFO becomes full.6.12  Define Trigger Generator Output Waveforms (TRIGWF) Note: This opcode is obsolete, and is included only for backward compatibilitywith the RVP6.  The opcode is disabled by default (See Section 3.3.1), becausethe interactive trigger setup procedure described in Section 4.4 is the preferredmethod of defining all RVP8 triggers and timing.  TRIGWF should not be usedin any new code applications that drive the RVP8.The RVP8 has a built-in trigger generator that can synthesize six independent digital outputwaveforms, each having arbitrary shape and being active anywhere in a window centered aroundzero-range.  The six trigger outputs can be defined by a 2048-word by 6-bit table which isloaded from the user computer.  The patterns are automatically read from the table and output tothe six trigger lines during each radar pulse.  The six outputs can be used for transmitter triggers,scope triggers, range strobes, PLL gates, etc.  The writable waveform table makes the RVP8unique, in that the detailed timing of trigger and related control signals can be easily adjusted insoftware, without having to resort to reprogramming PROMs.  This makes it possible for usersoftware to edit the trigger timing in a convenient interactive manner.Trigger waveforms are loaded using the TRIGWF command.  Four bits in the command word(PW0 through PW3) select which pulsewidths will receive the new waveforms.  On power-up,all four pulsewidths are initialized to user-selected waveforms.The first word following the TRIGWF command specifies the transition point of the POLAR0polarization control signal.  This control signal is either held low or high for the cases of fixedhorizontal or vertical polarization, or it alternates from pulse to pulse for fast-switchingpolarization measurements such as Zdr.  The transition point is specified as a value between 0and 2047, where 1024 represents range zero.  These units are the same as the time units for thewaveforms which follow, i.e., a 2048-word array holding 6-bit trigger patterns.  Bit 0 in each ofthese words affects the TGEN0 digital output line, bit 1 affects TGEN1, etc.  The bits are outputat a 7.195MHz rate, and the beginning of the 1024th array word (1025th word following the
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–34command) corresponds exactly to the instant at which data at range zero are sampled by theRVP8.  Note that the output rate can also be interpreted as a new bit coming every 1/48 km.  Insome cases this is a more useful view.As an example, suppose we wish to make the TGEN0 output be a 0.42 microsecond pretriggerpulse, with a rising edge exactly five microseconds prior to range zero.  This would be done bysetting bit 0 in input words 988, 989, and 990 following the TRIGWF command, and leaving allother bit 0’s clear.  Further, if TGEN1 was to be a 0.14 microsecond marker strobe at 20km, wewould simply set bit 1 of input word 1984.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               |PW3|PW2|PW1|PW0|           | 0   1   1   0   1 |  Command|_______________|___|___|___|___|___________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || H |               |  Transition Point of POLAR0 Control Line  |  Input 1|___|_______________|___________________________________________|H This bit defines the sense of the control line when horizontal polarization is se-lected.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                       | Bits for –142.22 usec |  Input 2|_______________________________________|___|___|___|___|___|___|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                       |  Bits for zero range  | Input 1025|_______________________________________|___|___|___|___|___|___|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                       | Bits for +142.08 usec | Input 2049|_______________________________________|___|___|___|___|___|___|6.13  Define Pulse Width Control Bits and PRT Limits(PWINFO) The RVP8 is equipped to control the radar transmitter’s pulse width and corresponding receiverbandwidth.  There are four pulse/bandwidth codes, numbered simply 0 through 3.  Theassociation between codes and pulse widths is completely determined by the needs andcapabilities of the particular radar on hand.  In some cases, the zero code might represent 0.25microsecond pulse width, and in other cases it may represent 2.0 microseconds.  Likewise, someradars may use all four codes, whereas others have fewer options from which to choose.  ThePWINFO command defines what happens for each of the four possible codes, but does notactually select which code is being used.  The later function is performed by SETPWF.The RVP8 drives four TTL output lines (PWBW0 – 3) which are intended to control the radarpulse/bandwidth hardware.  Typically this control is via relays or solid-state switches in thetransmitter and receiver.  The user decides what state the four lines assume for each pulse width
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–35code.  This is done using word #1 following the command, which contains four codes packedinto one 16-bit word.  The power-up default is to drive output line N low for a code of N,keeping all other lines high (Input of 7BDE Hex).  The flexibility in defining the output bitsusually makes the radar hardware connections very simple.  For example, if pulsewidth selectionrelied on choosing one of four relays, then each PWBWn line could serve directly as a relaydriver using the default pattern.For each pulse width there is a corresponding minimum trigger PRT permitted.  This bound isintended to limit the transmitter duty cycle to a safe value under all conditions.  PWINFO sets upthese minimum PRT’s using words 2 through 5 following the command.  The maximumfrequency of the internal trigger generator is then constrained at each pulse width to theindicated rate.  This protection applies at all times, i.e., during noise sampling, during rayprocessing, and during the standby time between rays.  The default PRT bounds are 2000, 1000,750, and 500 Hertz (Inputs of 3000, 6000, 8000, and 12000).  If your radar does not use all fourpulse width codes, it is still a good idea to set the unused PRT limits to reasonable values.  Thisway protection is still provided in the event that SETPWF accidently selects one of the unusedstates.  If the internal trigger generator is not being used, then the PRT limits no longer affect theactual trigger rate and transmitter protection becomes the responsibility of the the user hardware.Finally, note that the entire pulse/bandwidth mechanism can be effectively turned off by settingthe four bit patterns and the four PRT limits all to the same value.The PWINFO command can be disabled (for transmitter safety), so that PRT limits cannotaccidently be changed by the host computer.  When this is one, the RVP8 still reads the fiveinput words, but no changes are made to the pulse width and PRT information.  Thus, thecommand I/O behaves the same way, whether enabled or disabled.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 0   1   1   1   1 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Bits for PW 3 | Bits for PW 2 | Bits for PW 1 | Bits for PW 0 |  Input 1|_______________|_______________|_______________|_______________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 0   |  Input 2|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 1   |  Input 3|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 2   |  Input 4|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||  Min Trig Period (0.16667usec Increments) for Pulse Width 3   |  Input 5|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–366.14  Set Pulse Width and PRF (SETPWF)This command selects the pulsewidth and trigger rate.  A 2-bit pulse width code is passed in bits8 and 9 of the command word, and selects one of four pulse widths as described under PWINFO.The new radar PRT is passed in word #1.  For all processing modes that use a fixed trigger rate,this value defines the trigger period that is output at all times except during noise measurements.For Dual-PRF applications, this word defines the short period (high PRF) rate.  The long periodis internally computed as either 3/2, 4/3, or 5/4 the short period, and the trigger generatoralternates between the short and long rates on each successive ray.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | (Rsv) |  P.W. |           | 1   0   0   0   0 |  Command|_______________|_______|_______|___________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||   Desired Trigger Generator Period (0.16667usec Increments)   |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|When Input #1 is zero, then the arguments take on an alternate form that allows an array of N(up to 64) trigger periods to be specified, and also gives much finer time resolution in the choiceof each period.  The XARGS command is first used to load an array of N 32-bit words thatdefine the trigger period(s) in nanoseconds.  The RVP8 will then generate triggers whose shapes(relative starts and widths) are identical for each pulse, but whose periods follow the selectedsequence.  Trigger patterns such as these are intended to support research customers who use thereal–time (I,Q) data stream directly.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Lower 16–Bits of 32–Bit Trigger Period in Nanoseconds    |  XARG 1|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Upper 16–Bits of 32–Bit Trigger Period in Nanoseconds    |  XARG 2|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .6.15  Load Antenna Synchronization Table (LSYNC) The RVP8 can operate in a mode wherein radar data are acquired in synchronization with theantenna motion along either the azimuth or elevation axis.  This special feature frees the usercomputer from having to separately monitor the antenna angles and request each data rayindividually.  To use this mode, it is assumed that TAG0-15 are wired to receive azimuth angles,and that TAG15-31 are wired to receive elevation.  Angle input may be in the form of either16-bit binary angles, or four-digit BCD.  This synchronization mode is the only one whichascribes any meaning to the TAG inputs; ordinarily they are merely passed on to the usercomputer as ancillary information.Antenna synchronization is accomplished by way of a table of trigger angles.  This table, whichcontains between three and 1024 angles, is used to define the angle boundaries for eachprocessed ray.  The trigger angles need not be uniformly spaced, nor must they span the full
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–37360-degrees of rotation.  This gives considerable flexibility in the choice of angles.  Forexample, if local obstructions cause shadows in the radar image, then those regions can beskipped merely by omitting table entries in their vicinity.  Likewise, as the antenna rotates datacan be acquired within one or more sectors by simply specifying the appropriate sets ofcontiguous bearings at whatever angular resolution is desired.  Note that on power-up the angletable is initialized to 360 values corresponding to integer-valued degrees from zero to 359.The synchronization algorithm works automatically with either clockwise or counterclockwiseantenna rotation, and can tolerate any sequence of changes in direction, e.g., if the antenna itselfis scanning a sector, or if it is turning erratically.  Moreover, the trigger angles do not have to behit exactly in order to start each new ray — the antenna need only move across them.  Thisminimizes the possibility of losing data due to missing codes in the angle encoders.  The RVP8will automatically produce an output ray after one second of waiting, even if no trigger angleshave been crossed.  This is to avoid timeouts with the host computer when the antenna is notmoving at all.To use the synchronization mode, the trigger angle table is first loaded using the LSYNCcommand.  The user chooses the number of table entries and then writes the required number ofwords to the RVP8.  The angles must be supplied in a clockwise strictly increasing order, andthey must neither reach nor pass zero degrees by the table’s end.  The first value, however, maybe zero.  Binary angle representation is used wherein Bit 15 represents 180 degrees, Bit 14represents 90 degrees, etc.  The Ld bit must be set in the command word to indicate that a newtable size and set of angles are being loaded.  A flag bit is to be set (See GPARM) if errors aredetected when loading the table of angles.To actually enable synchronized operation the Ena command bit must eventually be set, and ELand BCD should be either set or cleared according to the user’s needs.  These bits may be usedindependent of reloading the actual table values.  Thus, antenna synchronization may be turnedon and off without having to reload the table each time.  However, if there were errors when thetable was last loaded, the processor ignores the Ena bit and synchronization is forced off.  Onceenabled, PROC commands are then issued in the usual manner to acquire and process the radardata.  Either the single-cycle or free-run PROC mode may be used.  Data collection proceeds asusual, except that the rays are now automatically aligned with the trigger angles.The angle sync algorithm is dynamic and works as follows.  Each ray begins immediately uponthe user’s request, or upon completion of the previous ray when in continuous processing mode.At the start of the ray, the RVP8 finds the pair of sync angles that enclose the previous triggerangle.  The current ray then runs until the antenna passes outside of either limit, at which pointprocessing for that ray is terminated.  Once this happens, a new trigger angle is assigned basedon which limit was crossed.The maximum number of pulses that will be present in each ray during angle syncing is stillgiven the by the Sample Size field of the SOPRM command.  The actual number of pulses willbe less only if a trigger angle is crossed before the full pulse count is reached.  In general, youshould set the Sample Size somewhat larger than the expected pulse count so that the triggerangle crossings make the best use of every available pulse when the antenna is scanning at theexpected rate.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–38  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||           |NoI|Ena|El |BCD|Ld |           | 1   0   0   0   1 |  Command|___________|___|___|___|___|___|___________|___________________|NoI Ordinarily, the potentially lengthy sync wait loop is terminated if the user writesadditional words to the RVP8.  Setting this bit prevents such interrupts.  Bewarethat the processor loop can not be broken in this case except by moving the anten-na across a trigger angle, or cycling the RESET_ line.Ena Enables antenna synchronization.El Synchronization is based on TAG15–31 (Elevation) inputs, else TAG0–15 (Azi-muth) is used.BCD Specifies that TAG angle input is in the form of 4-digit Binary Coded Decimal;otherwise, a 16-bit binary angle is assumed.Ld Indicates that a new table size and array of values follow the command.  If Ld = 0,then LSYNC is a one-word command only.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Number of Trigger Angles that Follow (3 – 1024)           |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                           (Ignored)                           |  Input 2|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||            First Trigger Angle (16-Bit Binary Angle)          |  Input 3|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||             Last Trigger Angle (16-Bit Binary Angle)          ||_______________________________________________________________|6.16  Set/Clear User LED (SLED)  This command simply turns the red user LED on and off under program control.  The LED is onduring the initial running of internal diagnostics, and then remains off unless changed by thiscommand.  Note that the red LED can be configured to serve as an internal activity indicator(see TTY setups), in which case this command has no effect.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                           |LED|           | 1   0   0   1   0 |  Command|___________________________|___|___________|___________________|6.17  TTY Operation (TTYOP) This command controls the TTY “chat mode” interface to the host computer.  The command cansimulate the typing of characters on the RVP8’s setup TTY.  Characters entered in this mannerare indistinguishable from those typed on the actual TTY; hence, whatever one can do via the
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–39TTY, one can also do via this command.  The RVP8 sends all TTY output to whichever stream(TTY, or host computer) provided the most recent input character.  This command is also used tomonitor the graphical data from the special scope plotting modes.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                               | Operation | 1   0   0   1   1 |  Command|_______________________________|___________|___________________|The operation codes are as follows:0 Sends the ASCII character in the upper byte of the word to the RVP8 as if it hadbeen typed on the setup TTY’s keyboard.1 Allow scope plotting data to be output whenever a plot is being drawn.  All rele-vant status and data words are output once upon each receipt of this command.Subsequently, status and data will be output only when a change has taken place.2 Disable the scope plotting output data.Any of the following types of data may be output by the RVP8 while the TTY monitor isrunning.  The order of arrival of each data type is indeterminate, but all multi-word sequenceswill always be output as contiguous words.Individual “TTY” characters generated by the RVP8 are output in the low byte of the word, withthe upper byte set to zeros.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0 |        ASCII Character        | TTY Char|_______________________________|_______________________________|The status of the plotting modes is given in the following word.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   0 |                                           |PLT| Status|_______________|___________________________________________|___|PLT Indicates that a scope plot is being drawn now.The 2-bit intensities of each of 16 possible strokes of data is given in the following 4-wordsequence.  An intensity of zero represents “OFF”; one, two and three are successively brighter.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–40  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   1 | 0   0   0   0 | Int 3 | Int 2 | Int 1 | Int 0 ||_______________|_______________|_______|_______|_______|_______|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   1 | 0   0   0   1 | Int 7 | Int 6 | Int 5 | Int 4 ||_______________|_______________|_______|_______|_______|_______|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   1 | 0   0   1   0 | Int 11| Int 10| Int 9 | Int 8 ||_______________|_______________|_______|_______|_______|_______|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   0   1 | 0   0   1   1 | Int 15| Int14 | Int 13| Int 12||_______________|_______________|_______|_______|_______|_______|The data for each stroke of the plot is given by the following sequence of 501 words.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   1   0 |                               | Stroke Number | Plot Data|_______________|_______________________________|_______________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   1   1 |            Value to Plot (0 – 4095)           | Word #1|_______________|_______________________________________________|..  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || 1   0   1   1 |            Value to Plot (0 – 4095)           | Word #500|_______________|_______________________________________________|6.18  Load Custom Range Normalization (LDRNV) Reflectivities computed by the RVP8 are ordinarily corrected for range effects by adding anoffset in deciBels equal to 20 log(R / 1km), where R is the range in kilometers.  This correctionis based on a simple filled beam geometry, and is sufficiently accurate for most meteorologicalobservations.  The LDRNV command is provided for applications in which an alternate customrange correction is required, for example, if the radar receiver’s LNA were to be driven by anexternal user-supplied STC waveform.LDRNV loads a 251-word custom correction table holding values in hundredths of deciBels overfive decades of log(range) from 0.01km to 1000km.  There are 50 table entries per decade ofrange.  Thus, the range in kilometers corresponding to an input word #N is 10N150 2, and thedefault correction table (automatically used on power-up) is simply 40(N101) .  The tablevalues are stored and interpolated whenever the RVP8 loads a new range mask (See LRMSK), atwhich point custom values for the actual user ranges are computed.  The LDRNV commandneed be issued only once, but it must be done prior to choosing the working set of range bins.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–41The linear intervening gas attenuation correction (See SOPRM) is always added to thereflectivity data, regardless of whether default or custom range normalization is in effect.  If thisis undesirable, the intervening gas slope should be set to zero.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           | 1   0   1   0   1 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Signed Hundredths dB of Range Normalization for Range 0.01 km |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   || Signed Hundredths dB of Range Normalization for Range 1000 km |  Input 251|_______________________________________________________________|6.19  Read Back Internal Tables and Parameters (RBACK) This command permits some of the RVP8 internal tables to be read back for confirmation anddiagnostic purposes.  This command would not generally be used during normal data acquisitionand processing.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | Data to Show  |           | 1   0   1   1   0 |  Command|_______________|_______________|___________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                   Number of words to output                   |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|The data that can be returned are:0 Full operational parameter table from last SOPRM command.1 Ray history array consisting of six words per ray for the last 40 rays (in reversetime order) that were processed.  Each six-word group holdsa.   Actual number of samples that went into the rayb.   Time since the last ray (in tenths of ms)c.   Ending azimuth TAG bitsd.   Ending elevation TAG bitse.   Starting azimuth TAG bitsf.   Starting elevation TAG bits2 Angle sync table from last LDSYNC command.4 Filter selection array from the last LFILT command.6 Custom range normalization from last LDRNV command.7 Samples of the TAG input lines at 4ms intervals.  The sampling begins at the mo-ment the RBACK command is received, and continues until the output count isreached.  Each 32-bit sample is output as a pair of 16-bit words:
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–42a.   Azimuth (TAG bits 0 – 15)b.   Elevation (TAG bits 16 – 31)8 Doppler clutter filter coefficients (Same format as for LFCOEFS command)10 Range mask spacing in cm for each pulsewidth6.20  Pass Auxiliary Arguments to Opcodes (XARGS) This command provides a backward compatible mechanism for supplying additional (optional)arguments to other opcodes.  The command may be used freely in the RVP8’s instruction stream,even if the opcode being modified does not expect any optional arguments.  XARGS will be aNOP in that case.To supply optional arguments to another opcode “OP”, the XARGS command is first executedwith the additional argument count encoded in its upper 11-bits.  This is followed by the array ofbetween 0 and 2047 additional arguments.  At this point the XARGS command is finished andthe “OP” command is fetched as the next instruction.  “OP” will execute normally, except thatthe additional arguments from XARGS can be picked up after its own input list has been read tocompletion.XARGS affects only the opcode that immediately follows it.  The entire list of optionalarguments is discarded after “OP” executes, even if “OP” did not use some or all of the list.However, if “OP” is yet another XARGS command, then the additional arguments that itsupplies will be appended to the first set.  In this way, XARGS can supply an arbitrarily largenumber of additional arguments.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||      Number of Additional Arguments N     | 1   1   0   0   0 |  Command|___________________________________________|___________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                   First Additional Argument                   |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                    Last Additional Argument                   |  Input N|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||          “OP” Command that accepts optional arguments         |  Command|_______________________________________________________________|                                .                                .6.21  Configure Ray Header Words (CFGHDR)The processed data that are output by the PROC command may contain optional header wordsthat give additional information about each ray.  This command configures the set of words thatmakeup each header.  There are (up to) thirty two different choices of words or groups of words
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–43to include, as indicated by the bit mask following the command.  Setting a bit requests that thosewords be included in the header, and be placed in the order implied by the sequence of the bits.Leaving all bits clear will suppress the header entirely; though this can also be done withoutchanging the configuration via the NHD (No-Headers) bit in SOPRM Input #2.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | 0   0   0   0   0   1   0   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                           |Gpm|Tim|Pul|PRT|Tag|  Input 1|___________________________________________|___|___|___|___|___|Tag Four words containing two 32-Bit TAG samples, one from the beginning and onefrom the end of the ray:Word #1 TAG15–0 Start of RayWord #2 TAG31–16 Start of RayWord #3 TAG15–0 End of RayWord #4 TAG31–16 End of RayWhen the RVP8 is operating in dual PRF mode, bit zero of the “start” TAG wordis replaced with a flag indicating that the ray’s PRF was low (0) or high (1).When trigger blanking is enabled, bit zero of the “end” TAG word is replacedwith a flag indicating that the trigger was blanked (0) or normal (1).  Note that thedata within a ray are considered to be invalid if any of the pulses that were usedto compute the ray were blanked.  Also, the RVP8 will output all zeroed datawhenever a ray contains any blanked pulses.PRT PRT (Pulse Repetition Time) measured at the end of the ray.  Same format asGPARM Word #30.  The measured PRT’s  are forced to 0xFFFF (the maximumunsigned value) whenever the external trigger is expected but missing.Pul Number of pulses that were used to compute the ray.Tim Time stamp.  Sixteen-bit counter incrementing at a rate of 1000 counts/sec, andsampled at the end of the ray.Gpm GPARM.  Sends a copy of the 64-word GPARM output with each ray.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                                                               |  Input 2|_______________________________________________________________|6.22  Configure Interference Filter (CFGINTF) The RVP8 can optionally apply an interference filter to its incoming (I,Q) data stream, with thegoal of rejecting occasional and sparse interference from other (usually man-made) signalsources.  The CFGINTF command is used to choose which filtering algorithm will be applied,and to configure its operation via additional XARGS parameters (See Section 6.20).
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–44If the XARGS are not supplied, then the filter parameters will simply retain their previousvalues.  Thus, CFGINTF with no XARGS can be used to turn the interference filters On/Offwithout making any other changes to their threshold constants.  Likewise, if only XARG 1 issupplied, then that single threshold value will be used for both C1 and C2.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||     Filter    | 0   0   0   0   0   1   1   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________________________________|Filter Chooses which interference algorithm should be run.  See Section 5.1.4 for a de-scription of the available algorithms.    0: None (Interference filtering is disabled)    1: Alg.1 (Traditional JMA Algorithm)    2: Alg.2 (Alg.1 optimized for additive interference)    3: Alg.3 (Alg.2 with better statistics)We recommend that you choose Alg.3 for general operational use.  The other algo-rithms are included mostly for historical reasons.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Threshold Parameter “C1” in Hundredths of deciBels      |  XARG 1|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||       Threshold Parameter “C2” in Hundredths of deciBels      |  XARG 2|_______________________________________________________________|6.23  Set AFC level (SETAFC)This command sets the AFC level to a given value.  The signed 16-bit span is identical toGPARM Output #51 which shows the present AFC level, i.e., corresponding to the –100% to+100% AFC range that is defined in the Mb menu.  The RVP8 will automatically convert thenew level into whatever analog or digital AFC output format has been configured. The onlyexception is for the Motor/Integrator type of AFC loop, in which case this command doesnothing.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | 0   0   0   0   1   0   1   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||         16–Bit AFC/MFC Value (–32768 through +32767)          |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|6.24  Set Trigger Timing Slew (SETSLEW)The Mt menu allows you to select a subset of triggers that can be slewed “left” and “right” inorder to place the burst pulse accurately at range zero.  This command allows you to manuallyset the present amount of slew.  The input argument is in hundredths of microseconds, i.e.,ranging from –327.68sec to +327.67sec.  The actual span permitted by the RVP8 is +20sec.This is the same format used in GPARM Output #56 which shows the present slew value.
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–45  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | 0   0   0   0   1   1   0   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||        Signed trigger slew in hundredths of microseconds      |  Input 1|_______________________________________________________________|6.25  Hunt for Burst Pulse (BPHUNT)This command starts up the internal procedure to hunt for a missing burst pulse when we areuncertain of both its time and frequency.  Depending on how the hunting process has beenconfigured in the Mb menu, the whole procedure may take several seconds to complete.  TheRVP8’s host computer interface remains completely functional during this time, but any acquireddata would certainly be questionable.  GPARM status bits in word #55 indicate when the huntprocedure is running, and whether it has completed successfully.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||           |Now| 0   0   0   0   1   1   1   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|___________|___|_______________________________________________|Now Forces the hunt procedure to be started even if the burst pulse is already present.Normally the procedure will only be started when the burst pulse is missing at thetime BPHUNT is given.6.26  Configure Phase Modulation (CFGPHZ)This command configures the RVP8 phase control output lines, which determine the relativephase of each transmitted pulse.  In some cases the phase sequence that is chosen will also haveside effects elsewhere in the processor, e.g., different algorithms may be used in Random Phasemode according to the transmit sequence that is requested.Some of the phase sequences chosen by CFGPHZ also expect additional arguments to have beensupplied by the XARGS command.  Phase sequences are expressed as a list of N 16-bit binaryangles representing the desired phase sequence.  The sequence is assumed to be periodic withperiod N.  The Mz command defines the correspondence between phase codes and phase angles,and is described in Section 3.3.8.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||   |   PhSeq   | 0   0   0   1   0   0   0   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|___|___________|_______________________________________________|PhSeq=0 Selects No Modulation.  The RVP8 outputs a constant default phase request asdefined in the Mz menu.PhSeq=1 Selects a Random Phase sequence.  This is also the default phase modulation thatwill be output following power-up.  From the set of valid phase codes that are de-fined in the Mz setup section, a random code is automatically chosen for eachpulse.  Each code has an equal probability of being chosen each time, and the
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–46choice is independent of any previous state.  No XARG words accompany thiscommand.PhSeq=2 Selects a User Defined sequence.  If no XARGS have been supplied, then theRVP8 outputs the default idle phase that is defined in Mz.  If XARGS are sup-plied, then they are interpreted as a sequence of 16-bit binary angles.  The RVP8will make the best match between each desired angle and the closest realizableangle that the phase modulation hardware can produce.  The maximum length ofthe sequence is 1024 pulses.PhSeq=3 Selects the SZ(8/64) sequence.  This is a systematic code due to Sachidananda andZrnic, which does a nice job separating and recovering first and second trip echoesin “Random Phase” mode.  It will usually perform better than a truly randomtransmit sequence, especially when the processing interval is fairly short (as littleas 32-pulses).  With no XARGS, the RVP8 automatically generates the phase se-quence using the closest realizable angles that the phase modulation hardware canproduce.  This is the recommended way to invoke SZ(8/64) coding.  However,you may also supply your own 32-pulse angle sequence.6.27  Set User IQ Bits (UIQBITS)Load user-specified bits that will be included with the pulse headers in the live (I,Q) data stream.The current permanent bits are stored right in the shared (I,Q) data segment, and a FIFO historyis also maintained so that the bits can be associated with the data being acquired right now as theUIQBITS opcode is executed.  Each 16-bit command arg specifies bits to Set/Clr in successivebytes of the structure.  This allows user code to safely change some bits without affecting others.The permanent Set/Clr bits are updated in the signal processor and retain their value from thelast time they were defined.  The bits are repeated into all pulse headers.  The ONCE bits,however, are transitory and will appear in only one pulse header each time they are set.The user bits from separate calls will never be collapsed into a single pulse header, even if theheader and bit times indicate that they could.  This means that each UIQBITS opcode willalways result in at least one pulse header being tagged with exactly those data.  This is generallywhat you want, since no other exact outcome could be guaranteed based on time-of-arrivalalone.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||               | 0   0   0   1   0   0   1   1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                 64 Permanent User Bits to SET                 |  Inputs 1–4|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                64 Permanent User Bits to CLEAR                |  Inputs 5–8|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                    64 Transitory ONCE Bits                    |  Inputs 9–12|_______________________________________________________________|
Host Computer CommandsRVP8 User’s ManualMay 20036–476.28  Custom User Opcode (USRINTR and USRCONT)These opcodes are part of the open software extensions to the RVP8, which allow customopcodes to be defined for each major mode of operation.  Arguments may be passed into acustom opcode handler as an XARG list.  Likewise, an optional array of words returned fromthat handler will appear after the command executes.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||   User Bits   | 1   1   1   1   1   0 |CON| 1   1   1   1   1 |  Command|_______________|_______________________|___|___________________|UserBits Four additional bits defined by the user to help subdivide the opcode functions ifdesired.CON If set, then the RVP8’s IQ data acquisition thread proceeds continuously while theopcode is executed.  If clear, then the IQ stream is interrupted prior to handling thecall.  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                      Optional Input Words                     |  XARG List|_______________________________________________________________|  15  14  13  12  11  10  9   8   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0 |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   |   ||                      Optional Output Words                    |  User Output|_______________________________________________________________|

Navigation menu